Dtfaen 12 R 30377 Specs

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT WORCESTER, MA AIRPORT TRAFFIC CONTROL TOWER CAB ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARED BY: FAA Technical Operations Eastern Service Area Engineering Services Terminal Engineering Center Boston FEBRUARY 2012
This page intentionally left blank.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 Health, Safety and Emergency Response Procedures Section 01 41 00 Reference Standards Section 01 52 19 Temporary Sanitary Facilities Section 01 51 23 Temporary Cooling Section 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Building Demolition DIVISION 3 though DIVISION 5 Not used. DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Not used. DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 54 19 Adhered Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Section 07 56 00 Fluid Applied Roofing DIVISION 8 OPENINGS Section 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Wallboard Section 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings Section 09 91 13 Exterior Painting Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 and DIVISION 11 Not used. DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 24 13 Transparent Plastic Window Shades DIVISION 13 through DIVISION 22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT Not used. DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping Section 23 31 13 Metal Ducts Section 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units Section 23 81 23 Computer Room Air Conditioners DIVISION 24 and DIVISION 25 Not used. DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Not used. DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping Section 23 31 13 Metal Ducts Section 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units Section 23 81 23 Computer Room Air Conditioners DIVISION 24 and DIVISION 25 Not used. DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Not used. DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: These Specifications cover the requirements of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) for work associated with the renovation of the Airport Traffic Control Tower and Base Building, at Worcester Municipal Airport, Worcester, MA . The Contractor shall provide and secure all labor, material, equipment, tools, transportation, and supplies required to complete the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and terms of the contract. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: A. Replacing existing Roof top HVAC unit on the ATCT, inclusive of seismic curb, ductwork, diffusers and grilles. B. Replace existing Computer Room Units in the Base Building Equipment Room C. Replace existing ATCT membrane roof, inclusive of flashing, coping, etc. D. Repair water-damaged gypsum wallboard in the ATCT stair and central vacuum room. E. Repaint existing ATCT catwalk railing. F. Replace existing ATCT cab acoustical suspended ceiling, inclusive of grid, equipment hoist and track.
G. Replace existing ATCT ceiling mounted lighting. H. Remove existing smoke exhaust fan and relief louver from ATCT cab and patch openings. I. Replace existing lighting protection air terminals on ATCT roof.
1.02 DIVISION OF SPECIFICATIONS: These Specifications are divided for convenience into sections as set forth in the table of contents. The items of work listed under each section are given for convenience and shall not be construed as a comprehensive list of items necessary to complete the work of any section. 1.03 STANDARD REFERENCES: Military, Federal, and Society Institutes and Associations, standards, specifications and codes, of the issues in effect on the date of this solicitation, form a part of this Specification and are applicable to the extent specified in each Specification section and to the extent that they do not conflict with the latest version of the International Building Code (IBC) in effect on the date of this solicitation. 1.04 LIST OF DRAWINGS: The drawings listed below form a part of the construction requirements for this contract:
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 10 11-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. ORH-704252-G000 ORH-704252-G001 ORH-704252-C001 ORH-704252-D001 ORH-704252-D002 ORH-704252-D003 ORH-704252-D004 ORH-704252-A001 ORH-704252-A002 ORH-704252-A003 ORH-704252-A004 TITLE SHEET INDEX SITE PLAN EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION PLAN HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN CAB CEILING AND ATCT STAIRS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION PLAN BASE BUILDING EQUIPMENT ROOM DEMOLITION MEMBRANE ROOFING PLAN AND DETAILS LIQUID APPLIED ROOFING DETAILS REFELCTED CEILING PLAN & PARTITION DETAILS PARTITION DETAILS AND EXTERIOR LOUVER DETAIL CAB HVAC REPLACEMENT PLAN CAB HVAC REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE BASE BUILIDNG EQUIPMENT ROOM HVAC REPLACEMENT PLAN CAB LIGHTING PLAN AND CAB ROOF LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLAN CAB HVAC REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM CAB HVAC REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL PLAN
L. ORH-704252- M001 M. ORH-704252-M002 N. ORH-704252-M003 O. ORH-704252-E001 P. ORH-704252-E002 Q. ORH-704252-E003
1.05 BUILDING PERMIT: This building is owned by the U.S. Government and building permits are not required. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS - NOT USED. EXECUTION - NOT USED.
*** END OF SECTION ***
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 10 11-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes the restrictions that effect construction operations, the use of premises, or acceptance of existing conditions. 1.02 SITE INSPECTION: The Contractor shall carefully examine the premises to determine the extent of work and the conditions under which it must be done. The commencement of work shall indicate the Contractors acceptance of the existing conditions as indicated on the drawings. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION LIMITS: The Contractor shall confine operations, activities, storage of materials and employee parking within the areas designated by the COTR. 1.04 SECURITY: Contractor's personnel may be subject to security investigation by the FAA Security and Hazardous Materials Division. Upon request from the COTR, the Contractor shall promptly complete all security forms provided for this purpose. At a minimum, the Contractor shall be required to provide a list of his employees and his subcontractors employee along with their social security numbers. 1.05 USE OF PREMISES: The Contractor will not have complete and exclusive use of the premises for the execution of work. The work to be performed is within an active air traffic control facility, and all FAA operations shall take precedence over any and all work performed by the Contractor. If, at any time, the work of the Contractor is disruptive to the performance of FAA functions, the Contractor shall be directed to cease work and shall reschedule the work with the COTR. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall maintain the job site in a neat and orderly condition. This includes the daily removal of rubbish, waste, tools, equipment, and materials not required for the work in progress. 1.06 HOURS OF WORK: The general work hours shall be 6:00am to 5:00pm, Monday through Thursday or otherwise as coordinated in advance with or as directed by the COTR. Work in the Control Cab and on the Cab Roof that is disruptive to the performance of air traffic control activities must be done at night after the tower is closed. All night work shall be coordinated in advance with the COTR. 1.07 MATERIAL STORAGE: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of his products stored on the site. The Contractor shall limit his material storage to the staging area designed by the COTR.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01140-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1.08 DEBRIS REMOVAL: The Contractor and his subcontractors shall maintain the job site in a neat and orderly condition. This includes the daily removal of rubbish, waste, tools, equipment, and materials not required for the work in progress. Surfaces including walls and flooring shall be cleaned and vacuumed prior to the end of each shift. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED.
PART 3
EXECUTION --NOT USED.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01140-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This Section describes the requirements for the Contractor's administration of his subcontractors. It also describes the administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating various parts of this Work under this Contract including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: A. Project Coordination. B. Project Manager. C. Document Control. D. Administrative Procedures. E. Conservation. F. Order of Precedence. G. Coordination Drawings. H. Meetings. I. 1.02 Permits. PROJECT COORDINATION:
A. Division of Work: It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to divide the Work among the subcontractors. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of all trades used on the Project. B. The Contractor shall resolve all coordination conflicts that arise among its subcontractors. C. The division of the Contract Document into areas of similar types of work is not intended to represent a division of work between trades or subcontractors, but merely for convenience in reading specifications and Drawings. Separation of Specifications into sections or representation of like work on the Drawings shall not make the Government an arbiter to establish subcontract limits between the Contractor and subcontractors, or between different trades and subcontractors. D. Coordinate construction operations to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work. Coordinate construction operations included under different sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT E. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. F. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. G. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for the Contracting Officer and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. 1.03 PROJECT MANAGER:
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of one of his/her administrative employees, entitled the Project Manager for this Project, whose responsibilities are to coordinate and expedite all phases of the Work required for the Project to ensure that the construction schedule is developed properly in complete accordance with this Specification and subsequently maintained. B. The Project Manager shall attend all meetings between the Contractor and the FAA, the Contractor and his subcontractors, and any other meetings, which affect the process of the job. The Project Manager shall be knowledgeable of the status of all parts of the Work throughout the length of the Contract. C. If, in the judgment of the FAA, the Project Manager is not sufficiently experienced and versatile in the preparation, interpretation, and modification of design and construction schedules, the Contractor shall engage the services of a consultant, subject to the approval of the FAA, for the scheduling work required by the Contract. If a consultant is engaged, he or she shall be present at the first meeting, along with the Project Manager, prepared to discuss in detail, the methods and techniques he or she proposes to use. Thereafter, the Project Manager or the consultant responsible for updating the Critical Path Schedule shall attend all meetings between the Contractor, his subcontractors, and any other meetings, which will affect the CPM Schedule.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Preparation of schedules. B. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
01310-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT C. Delivery and processing of submittals. D. Tracking changes. E. Progress meetings. F. Project closeout activities. 1.05 CONSERVATION: Coordinate construction work to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the work. 1.06 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE: Coordinate work in a manner to avoid conflicts or interference between trades. Layout work in advance of installation to ascertain location of various systems and arrangement of ductwork, piping, conduit and equipment. Coordinate work and take action as necessary to avoid conflicts between the work of the various trades. Establish the exact locations of equipment based on actual dimensions of the items furnished. 1.07 MEETINGS:
A. Construction meetings shall be held at the site at the discretion of the COTR. Meeting times and days may vary from week to week. Special meetings may be scheduled if requested by either the COTR or the Contractor. B. The following persons shall attend construction meetings: COTR, Contractor's Superintendent, Contractor's Project Manager, a representative for each major trade currently on site, and others as requested by the COTR, or the Contractor. The FAA will chair the meeting. Minutes of the meeting will be written by the Contractor and distributed to the FAA COTR within two calendar days of the meeting. The FAA will review and concur on the meeting minutes. C. Agenda: The subjects to be discussed at the construction meetings shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Review of the previous meeting pending items. 2. Review of progress of work since last meeting. 3. Review of latest construction schedules. 4. Field problems and discussion. 5. Problems affecting planned progress. 6. Review of offsite fabrication problems. 7. Construction schedule revisions. 8. Progress planned during next work period. 9. Submittal schedule and expediting submittals. 10. Quality and work standards. 11. Review of changes for effect on construction schedules and completion dates.
01310-3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 12. Other current business. 1.08 WEEKLY SCHEDULES: At each weekly construction meeting, the Contractor shall be required to produce and submit to the FAA a detailed work plan, which clearly shows the work planned for the two (2) week period to immediately follow. The two-week schedule should be formatted in the same manner as the final baseline project schedule. It should contain a column with the activity descriptions down the left side of the page, and a bar-chart format for the activities. The schedule should be clearly titled and dated on the bottom of the sheet. 1.09 WORKERS AND VISITORS LOG: The Contractor shall submit a daily record of all personnel on site to the COTR. All visitors to the job site shall be required to check in with the Contractors superintendent. 1.10 CODE COMPLIANCE: Perform the construction in compliance with the most current editions of and IBC Building Codes, and the Specifications and Drawings. If Contract Documents exceed code requirements, the Contract Documents shall govern. If there is a discrepancy between the Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications shall govern.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED.)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED.)
**END OF SECTION**
01310-4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for submittal of shop drawings, product data, samples, warranties, certificates, test reports, operations/maintenance instructions, parts lists, as-built drawings and utility survey as required by the Contract Documents. The submittals required by this contract are further described under each individual section of this specification. 1.02 DEFINITION: The term "submittal" refers to shop drawings, product data, samples, certificates, test reports, installation procedures, operation and maintenance instructions and additional data presented by the Contractor for review and approval by the Government 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: The following requirements will apply to all required submittals unless otherwise noted: A. Number of copies: Three (3) copies of each submittal (or the number of copies required by individual section) shall be submitted to the COTR. One (1) copy will be returned to the Contractor. Should the Contractor need additional copies, he shall state the number needed and submit enough additional copies to meet this requirement. In lieu of hard copies, the Contractor is highly encouraged to submit documents required by this section in electronic format (i.e. PDF) via email. B. Time for approval: All submittals must be approved prior to the incorporation of the materials, equipment, or technique they represent, into the work. Time necessary for Government approval or disapproval of submittals shall be 14 calendar days after receipt of the item. After a submittal has been approved, no substitutions will be permitted without written approval by the COTR. C. Transmittal form: When making a submittal, the Contractor shall use his companys standard transmittal form or the form provided at the end of this Section. D. Certification: The Contractor shall check each submittal prior to submission to the COTR for conformance to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall certify that all contractual requirements have been met. This certification shall be written, stamped or printed on each submittal prior to submitting to COTR and shall be as follows: I certify that I have checked these documents and that, to the best of my knowledge, they are in complete compliance with the Contract Documents. Company Name_____________________________________________ Date_________________________By___________________________
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT E. Incomplete submittal: Should the Contractor omit items from his submittal he is not relieved from furnishing the same, even though submittal is approved by the COTR. If insufficient information is provided for the Government to determine conformance with these specifications, the submittal shall be returned to the Contractor unreviewed. F. Approved as Submitted: If Approved as Submitted is marked by the COTR, the submittal is satisfactory. After submittal has been approved, no substitution will be permitted without written approval by the COTR. G. Approved as Noted: If Approved as Noted is marked by the COTR, the submittal is satisfactory contingent upon Contractor acceptance of corrections or notations, or both and, if accepted, does not require resubmittal. H. Approved as Noted, Resubmittal Required: If Approved as Noted, Resubmittal Required is marked by the COTR, the submittal is satisfactory contingent upon recommended corrections and must be resubmitted to the COTR within 5 calendar days for final approval. I. Disapproved: If Disapproved is noted by the COTR, the submittal does not meet the contract requirements and the Contractor must resubmit within 5 calendar days. The Contractor must resubmit in the same quantity, including reproducibles, as specified in the original submittals, for approval. The COTRs approval of resubmittals will require 14 calendar days after receipt of the item. Make all corrections required by the COTR and indicate all corrections with a revision symbol and revised date. This resubmittal process shall continue until submittal has been approved. Limitation of approvals: The checking, marking or approval of the shop drawings and/or product data by the COTR shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error that may exist. The Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections, details, and satisfactory construction of all work.
J.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: As used in this Section, shop drawings shall be defined as drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other data prepared specifically for this Contract, by the Contractor or through the Contractor by way of a subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier contractor, to illustrate a portion of the work. A. Requirements: All connections necessary to complete the work under this contract shall be detailed and completed in a satisfactory method by the Contractor. This shall apply with equal force to items not shown or specified, but necessary to make indicated or specified connections or modifications to existing work and connection for any future installation indicated on the drawings or specified. All parts detailed by the Contractor shall be strong enough to withstand, without excessive deflection, any loads or pressures to which they are likely to be subjected to develop the strength of the members connected. In no case shall the construction be inferior in any manner to that required by
01 33 00-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT the contract documents. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on contract drawings. Indicate gauge or thickness, anchors and fastening types, and sizes of all items to be fabricated. Describe finish, method of application for all materials. B. Verification: Prior to fabrication of materials, verify all field measurements and submit all shop drawings required by the technical specifications so as not to cause any delay in the work. C. Equipment clearances: Do not proceed with any construction that may be affected in any manner by machinery and equipment until submission and approval of shop and erection drawings, schedules, and equipment layouts showing all components with dimensions and necessary clearances. D. Related work: In indicating or describing the work and materials for related work in the submittals, the term "by others" is not acceptable. The specific installers and trades to furnish and install such related work shall be clearly noted by name or description; where such name or description is missing, it shall be understood and agreed that the Contractor is to furnish and install such related work. 1.05 SAMPLES: As used in this Section, samples are defined as physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship, physically identical to a portion of the work, illustrating a portion of the work or establishing standards for evaluating the appearance of the finished work or both. Samples of all materials to be installed in the same room shall be submitted at the same time (i.e. paint and carpet). A. Quantities: Unless otherwise specified or directed, submit two (2) samples to the COTR. B. Identification: Label or tag each sample or set of samples, identifying the sample's name and quality, manufacturer's name and address, brand name, catalog number, project title, Contractor's name, date, and intended use. C. Colors, patterns and textures: For items required to be of selected and approved colors, patterns, textures, or other finish requirements, obtain instructions from the COTR and submit sufficient samples to show the range of shades, tones, values, patterns textures, or other features corresponding to the instructions. Submit color samples of field-applied paint materials. D. Approved samples: Approved samples may be incorporated in the job if approved by the COTR. The Contractor must state his request to use a sample in the construction on the submittal transmittal form. 1.06 CATALOG DATA: As used in this Section, catalog data consists of reprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance, charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate a portion of the work, but not prepared exclusively for this Contract.
01 33 00-3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT A. Requirements: Furnish catalog and technical data for all products, items of machinery and equipment covered under the Contract Documents. This shall include all Contractor furnished manufactured items. B. Preparation: All catalog data must be submitted using the following directions: Clearly mark or highlight each copy to identify pertinent products or models the Contractor intends to use. If the submittal is not clearly marked by the Contractor regarding the data indicated above, the submittal will be disapproved and returned. C. Drawings: Catalog data submittal shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for submitting complete drawings and schedules; however, standard machinery and equipment need not be detailed, but all sizes, supports, connections, and clearances shall be indicated and detailed. D. Manufacturer's instructions: Where installation of work is required to be in accordance with the product manufacturer's directions, the Contractor shall obtain and distribute the necessary copies of the directions 7 calendar days prior to installation. 1.07 CERTIFICATES: Assemble certificates of compliance, executed by each of the respective makers, suppliers, and subcontractors. Provide complete information for each item to certify compliance with contract documents: Product or work item, firm with name of principal and scope of compliance. 1.08 TEST REPORTS: Promptly submit a written report of each test and inspection containing the following information: A. Date issued. B. Project title and number. C. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. D. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. E. Date and time of sampling or inspection. F. Record of temperature and weather conditions. G. Date of test. H. Identification of product and Specification. I. Location of sample or test in the project. J. Type of inspection test.
01 33 00-4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT K. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Document. L. Interpretation of test results, when requested by the COTR.
PART 2
PRODUCTS --NOT USED.
PART 3
EXECUTION --NOT USED. *** END OF SECTION ***
01 33 00-5
MATERIAL APPROVAL SUBMITTAL

(See Instructions on Reverse)
TO (Contracting Officer)
FROM (Contractor)
DATE:
CONTRACT NUMBER
SUBMISSION NUMBER
SUBMITTAL NEW RESUBMITTAL
PREVIOUS SUBMISSION NUMBER
PROJECT / LOCATION
ITEM NO.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS SPECIFICATION (Include Type, Model #, Catalog #, Mfg., Etc.) SECTION/ PARA NO./ DRAWING NO.
APPROV ED
FOR GOVERNMENT USE ONLY DISSEE INITIAL APPROVED REVERSE
TYPED OR PRINTED NAME
SIGNATURE
FOR GOVERNMENT USE ONLY
DATE
TO (Project Engineer)
FOR EVALUATION AND ACTION
TYPED OR PRINTED NAME TO (Contracting Officer)
SIGNATURE
DATE
Recommended Approval Disapproved as indicated above and subject to any applicable comments on the reverse side.
TYPED OR PRINTED NAME TO (CONTRACTOR)
SIGNATURE
DATE
Approved Disapproved as indicated above and subject to any applicable comments on the reverse side. Request resubmittal on disapproved items within 5 days of date shown below.
TYPED OR PRINTED NAME
SIGNATURE
DATE
01 33 00-6
COMMENTS
(Number to correspond with applicable item number on reverse.)
INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS 1. The term "material" is defined as articles, supplies, raw materials, equipment, parts, components, and end items that are to be incorporated into the work required by the contract. 2. This form is to be used by contractors for submitting shop drawings, equipment data, manufacturer's literature, certificates, and samples of materials to the government for approval in accordance with the provisions of this contract. 3. Item(s) to be approved will be clearly tabbed or identified. Data pertaining to item(s) to be approved will be clearly identified or tabbed, particularly where documents are voluminous, in order to properly evaluate the materials or articles to be incorporated in the work. Each attachment will be numbered to correspond with the item number shown on the face of this form. 4. Requests submitted shall be numbered consecutively, by contract in the space entitled "Submission No." This number, in addition to the Contract No., will be used to identify each Material Approval Submittal. Resubmissions will be indicated in the appropriate block and the insertion of previous submission number and date in addition to a new submission number. A single submission should be used for all work of a section of the specification, but in NO instance should the submission include work for more than one (1) contract. Submittals requiring priority handling will be submitted by separate submittal using the form and so marked across the face of the form. 5. This Material Approval Submittal is not valid unless it is signed by the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). This approval is required as called for by the Contracting Officer under the terms of this contract.
01 33 00-7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT SECTION 01 35 29 HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY This section describes the requirements for the Contractors employee health and safety and procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency or accident. REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
1.02
ANSI A10.32
Personal Fall Protection - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition Operations Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ANSI Z359.1
ANSI/ASSE A10.34
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 10 NFPA 241 Portable Fire Extinguishers Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work National Electrical Code Electrical Safety in the Workplace
NFPA 51B
NFPA 70 NFPA 70E
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES
01 35 29- 1
29 CFR 1910 29 CFR 1910.146 29 CFR 1926 29 CFR 1926.500 1.03
Occupational Safety and Health Standards Permit-required Confined Spaces Safety and Health Regulations for Construction Fall Protection
SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): The Contractor shall furnish to the COTR the MSDSs of each material not less than 5 calendar days before it is brought on site. The Contractor shall place all MSDSs in a binder and in an accessible location so that all employees have access to them. The binder shall be updated each time a new material is brought on site or when a material is taken off site. The Contractor shall inform the COTR when a material is brought on site or taken off site, so the COTR can update his MSDS file. After submission of the MSDS, no product substitution is allowed without prior approval from the COTR. B. Accident Prevention Plan (APP): The Contractor will be required to submit his plan, within 7 calendar days of contract award, for maintaining a safe working environment for construction workers employed on this project. The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. The plan shall detail work practices used to comply with health and safety requirements. This plans shall include but not limited to designating competent persons, detailing emergency plans, showing training certificates of personnel as pertaining to the work to be performed, detailing company safety programs as pertaining to the work to be performed, showing weekly tail gate meetings, scheduling inspections of equipment to check for potential hazards created by wear, etc. and providing a statement that the current OSHA regulations on safety in the construction industry will be followed. The plan will be used by the COTR to assure work is accomplished in accordance with accepted safety practices. The COTR may stop any operation, which is in violation of the OSHA standards and fails to comply with the safety plan or accepted safe work practices. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining safety plans from all subcontractors on this project. These safety plans must address the type of work the subcontractor will be performing and be submitted 7 calendar days before any work is to be perform by that subcontractor. C. Accident reports: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors submit to their insurance carriers and/or the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, shall be forwarded through the COTR to the CO as soon as possible, but in no event later than 48 hours after the accident occurred. 1.04 DEFINITIONS
01 35 29- 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT A. Competent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling. B. High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity and/or high visibility. C. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel. D. Operating Envelope. The area surrounding any crane. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers, rigging gear between the hook and the load, the load and the crane's supporting structure (ground, rail, etc.). E. Qualified Person for Fall Protection. A person with a recognized degree or professional certificate and with extensive knowledge, training and experience in the field of fall protection; who is capable of performing design, analysis, and evaluation of fall protection systems and equipment. F. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness that results in: 1. Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness; 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset); Restricted work; Transfer to another job; Medical treatment beyond first aid; Loss of consciousness; or
7. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above.
G. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; and/or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, and/or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or injury occur. A component
01 35 29- 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, roll over, etc.).
1.05
SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS
A. Personnel Qualifications 1. Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)/Superintendent Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) shall be provided at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor. The SSHO shall meet the following requirements: A minimum of 3 years safety work on similar project. 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within last 3 years. Competent person training as needed. B. Personnel Duties 1. Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)/Superintendent a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Safety inspection logs shall be attached to the Contractors' daily report. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings. Implement and enforce accepted APPs. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. A list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies shall be posted on the safety bulletin board. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
b.
c. d.
e. f.
g.
01 35 29- 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the superintendent and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage. The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement.
C. Meetings 1. Pre-construction Conference a Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP. The Contractor shall discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, and procedures. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for acceptance. Work shall not begin until there is an accepted APP. The attached FAA Project Safety and Health Checklist will be reviewed.
2. Safety Meetings Safety meetings shall be held during the progression of the project. The meeting shall be held 5 calendar days before a critical phase of construction begins, as each new subcontractor is brought on site, or at the request of the COTR. At minimum the COTR, Contractors safety representative, and the any subcontractors safety representative shall attend. These meeting are used to review the safety plans, detail work practices, and review safety equipment to be used in the next phase of the project. All persons pertinent to that discussion (i.e. fire officials, airport managers, union representatives) shall be invited. Minutes showing contract title and signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed shall be prepared by the Contractor and provided to the COTR within 5 calendar days. 1.06 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP) The Contractor shall use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below. The APP shall be job-specific and shall address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP shall be included in the applicable APP element and made sitespecific. The Government considers the General Contractor to be the "controlling HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 01 35 29- 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the on-site superintendent, and the designated site safety and health officer. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any hazard become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, all necessary action shall be taken to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public and the environment. Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained by the COTR at the job site. A. APP Contents: 1. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. The duties of each position shall be specified. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, competent persons shall be designated and qualifications submitted for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance. Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan. The plan shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. It shall address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to
2.
3.
01 35 29- 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 1.8 m (6 feet). A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the plan. The plan shall include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. The accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be kept and maintained at the job site for the duration of the project. The Fall Protection and Prevention Plan shall be included in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). 1.07 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION The Contractor shall make his APP readily available for review by his employees. The Contractor shall post the following information, within 1 calendar day after commencement of work in a visible location: telephone number for emergency responders, address of nearest hospital with emergency room, names of employees certified in CPR/First Aid, location of first aid kit and any other information deemed necessary by the SSHO and/or COTR.
1.08
EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. The Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment to the Contractor, his employees and subcontractors. The Contractor must provide at least one employee on site at all times who is has received CPR/First Aid training.
1.09
A.
REPORTS Accident Reports 1. For recordable injuries and illnesses, and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2,000 in damages, the Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident and provide a report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar day(s) of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms. 2. For any weight handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) the Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, and provide a report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Crane operations shall not proceed until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the COTR.
B. Accident Notification Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but not later than four hours, after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater than $2,000, or any weight handling HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 01 35 29- 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT equipment accident. Information shall include contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation is conducted. 1.10 HOT WORK Prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding, cutting, etc.) or operating other flameproducing/spark producing devices, a written permission shall be requested from the COTR. The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this site. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
NOT USED.
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORK The Contractor shall comply with the APP, the AHA, Federal and/or State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard shall prevail.
A. Hazardous Material Use Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material. B. Hazardous Material Exclusions Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 01 35 29- 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials.
3.02
FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM The Contractor shall establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. The program shall include company policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures.
A. Training The Contractor shall institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard Protection and Prevention Program, the Contractor shall provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. A competent person for fall protection shall provide the training. B. Fall Protection Equipment and Systems The Contractor shall enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with 29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, and ANSI A10.32. C. Personal Fall Arrest Equipment Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall meet ANSI Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only locking snap hooks and carabineers shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 1.8 m (6 feet). The total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a fall arrest system.
01 35 29- 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT D. Horizontal Lifelines Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, certified and used under the supervision of a qualified person for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500). E. Guardrails and Safety Nets Guardrails and safety nets shall be designed, installed and used in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M. F. Rescue and Evacuation Procedures When personal fall arrest systems are used, the contractor must ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. A Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be prepared by the contractor and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. The Rescue and Evacuation Plan shall be included in the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). 3.03 SCAFFOLDING Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Access to scaffold platforms greater 20 feet in height shall be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system. Vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers shall not be used for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet in height. The use of an adequate gate is required. Contractor shall ensure that employees are qualified to perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward. Special care shall be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Work platforms shall be placed on mud sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than 6 feet. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above 6 feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.
01 35 29- 10
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT A. Stilts The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction, renovation, repair or maintenance work is prohibited.
3.04
UTILITIES WITHIN CONCRETE SLABS Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify due to the reinforcing steel used in the construction of these structures. Whenever contract work involves concrete chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling, the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to a private locating service. Outages to isolate utility systems shall be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the contractor from meeting this requirement.
3.05
ELECTRICAL
A. Conduct of Electrical Work Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification. The Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method. When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers shall be permitted to enter. When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves, fire retarding shirts, coveralls, face shields, and safety glasses. In addition, provide electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA. B. Portable Extension Cords Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage. All damaged extension cords shall be
01 35 29- 11
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT immediately removed from service. Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70. END OF SECTION
01 35 29- 12
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes information required for conformance to regulatory requirements, including building codes, mechanical codes, electrical codes, FAA orders and standards, and other regulations applicable to the project. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall conform to the latest edition of the following regulations and standards (not listed in order of precedence) in effect on the date of this solicitation: A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) C. National Electrical Code (NEC) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) E. County and Health Department Ordinances F. City and State Fire Marshall Regulations G. American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM) H. American Concrete Institute (ACI) I. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) J. International Building Code K. International Plumbing Code L. International Mechanical Code M. Maine State Building Code N. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Orders and Standards 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS: All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable State and National codes, specifications, and industry standards, subject to review and approval of the COTR. All material shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as conforming to its standards and so labeled in every case where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED. EXECUTION -- NOT USED.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01 42 19-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT SECTION 01 52 19 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for temporary construction facilities and equipment including sanitary facilities 1.02 REQUIREMENTS: Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities required for construction and remove upon completion of the work as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONSTRUCTION TOILET FACILITIES: The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain the following: A. Movable Facility: Provide, install, and maintain, for the duration of the work, temporary outside toilet facilities for the use of the workmen, superintendent and construction personnel. Toilet facility shall be housed in a weather-tight, elevated and floored structure located advantageously and provided with suitable light, heat, and ventilation and an exterior door with latch. Toilet shall be clean, equipped and sanitary at all times. B. At completion of the work, the toilets shall be removed from the site and the portion of the site occupied by the toilets properly cleaned and graded and left in an acceptable condition. PART 3 EXECUTION (Not used)
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
01 52 19 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT SECTION 01 51 23 TEMPORARY COOLING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirement to provide temporary air conditioning during construction. 1.2 NOTICES: Send proper notices, make all necessary arrangements, and perform other services in the care and maintenance of public utilities. 1.3 TEMPORARY HVAC: The Contractor shall furnish and install and maintain two (2) temporary air conditioning units to serve the ATCT control cab during construction. The units shall be installed and fully operational before proceeding with the removal of the existing rooftop unit. Units shall be new or the Contractor shall provide sufficient evidence that the unit was recently serviced and cleaned. The temporary AC units shall be provided with a 24/7-service contract to provide immediate response by a service contractor if units shall fail. If units cannot be immediately repaired, new temporary units shall be immediately installed. Provide new filters and replace on a monthly basis or as directed by the COTR. 1.3.1 The HVAC units shall provide a minimum of two and a half (2 1/2) tons of cooling each. The Contractor shall submit the proposed temporary unit for review and approval by the FAA. The submittal shall include the method of connecting the condenser section to a source of outside air. 1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide temporary power feeds to the temporary units. Coordinate source location with COTR. The temporary power feeds shall not be those power feeds presently used for the existing roof top unit. FAA will coordinate with the Contractor to identify a power panel with additional spare space. 1.3.3 The temporary AC units shall include a separate thermostatic control from 55F to 85F so that the building occupants can adjust the amount of cooling required. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall submit the following for review and approval in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1.4.1 Temporary Cooling Plan: The Contractor shall submit his plan for temporary cooling The submittal shall include product data for the proposed temporary unit for review and approval by the COTR. The submittal shall also include method of connecting condenser section to source of outside air. 1.4.2 24/7-Service Contract: The Contractor shall submit verification of the servicing and cleaning contract for the temporary unit. Provide a copy of the 24/7-
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT service contract that shows that upon failure of the temporary unit, a service technician will arrive at the site within four (4) hours to repair or replace the unit at no cost to the Government for either parts or service. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) **END OF SECTION**
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section covers the provision for labor, materials, equipment and procedures for the protection of occupants and existing buildings during construction. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS: Care shall be exercised to protect all adjoining surfaces, equipment, utility lines, materials, and structures from damage, including damage by fire or water, and by the Contractor's operations. All work shall be performed in a safe manner and in accordance with local fire and safety regulations. Any damage to the work, or materials of others, or to other structures resulting from the Contractor's operations under this contract shall be promptly repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). 1.03 BARRIERS: Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain suitable barriers, from beginning to completion of contract, as required to prevent public entry, and to protect the work, existing facilities, and building occupants from construction operations. 1.04 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: All work performed under the contract, and all equipment, appliances, tools, hoists, scaffolds, and other items used in the work shall conform to all Federal, State and local safety codes and regulations. A. Construct temporary barricades, walkways, passageways, etc., that are necessary to protect persons and property from hazard or damage due to construction operations. Site safety devices shall be designed and constructed to have sufficient strength and of such materials as will accomplish their protective function. Provide warning signs, hazard and service lights, etc., as necessary for the protection of persons from injury due to construction operations. 1.05 NOISE AND DUST CONTROL: Throughout the contract period, the Contractor shall effectively control dust in the working areas and storage areas connected with this project. A. The Contractor furnish, erect and maintain temporary barriers and similar coverings to control the spread of dust and noise caused by construction activities to FAA occupied areas B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and place coverings on all furnishings to protect FAA equipment from damage and dust during construction activities Protection systems shall be removed along with any construction supplies, equipment and/or materials at the end of daily activities. The Contractor shall broom clean areas to be occupied by the FAA during normal working hours.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
01 56 00-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1.06 POWDER DRIVEN FASTENERS: Prior to the use of powder driven fasteners, approval from the COTR is required. The Contractor must notify the COTR of his intent to use powder driven fasteners at least 48 hours in advance. Adequate safety precautions for the public and workmen shall be provided, and the responsibility for these measures shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.07 CUTTING AND REPAIRING: Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall coordinate all cutting work by and for the various trades, and shall be responsible for all repair and refinishing required. Cutting torches shall not be used. 1.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK: The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and protection of the work under construction and of the completed work until the Government has made final acceptance A. Protection of finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage shall be accomplished by the following: In areas subject to foot traffic, heavy paper, sheet goods, or other materials shall be secured in place. For movement of heavy products, planking of similar materials shall be laid in place. For storage of products, tight wood sheeting shall be laid in place. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED. EXECUTION --NOT USED.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
01 56 00-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for maintaining the site in a neat condition during construction and for final cleaning prior to final inspection by the FAA. This section also describes the requirements for rodent (mouse) removal and sanitation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00:
A. Dust control plan: The plan, submitted with the Contractors Safety Plan, shall detail all procedures to be used to prevent the migration of dust. B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of MSDS for all cleaning products. Those products that create a hazard to personnel or property will not be allowed. 1.03 SITE MAINTENANCE:
A. All areas under the Contractor's control shall be maintained free of extraneous debris. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition at all times. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at the construction site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes. B. No on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish will be allowed. The Contractor shall remove debris daily in accordance with the limitations set forth in Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions. C. Daily collections and disposal of debris shall be scheduled with additional collection and disposal of debris provided whenever the periodic collection is inadequate to prevent accumulation. Rubbish transportation shall conform to Massachusetts Port Authority requirements. 1.04 PROGRESS CLEANING:
A. The Contractor shall clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and shall clean on an as-needed basis until painting is finished. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. B. Operations shall be scheduled such that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING:
CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 74 00-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT A. Products: Only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces shall be used. The use of green products is highly encouraged. Cleaning materials and methods as recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned shall be used. B. Execution: The Contractor shall employ skilled workers for final cleaning. 1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesive, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from visible interior surfaces, including cabinetry, and countertops. 2. Wash vinyl and ceramic tile floors. 3. Vacuum carpets. C. Prior to final inspection by the FAA, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sightexposed interior surfaces, and all work areas to verify that the entire work is clean. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS --NOT USED. EXECUTION --NOT USED.
CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 74 00-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for contract closeout at the completion of work. 1.02 FINAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall assemble all appropriate warranties, product information, certifications, equipment installation instructions, test results and operation and maintenance manuals and submit to the COTR for approval. 1.03 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION: When the Contractor considers the work to be substantially completed, the Contractor shall submit a signed certification stating the following: A. Contract Documents have been reviewed and work inspected for compliance with the contract, including punch list work, and accepted by the FAA. B. All materials used in the project are asbestos and lead free. C. Record documents, as-built drawings, final project photographs, and similar final record information as required and acceptable to the COTR have been submitted by Contractor. D. Equipment/systems have been tested in the presence of the COTR and are operational. E. Required operational, and maintenance instructions, data and parts list have been submitted and approved. F. Spare parts have been provided as required. G. Warranties and guarantees have been prepared and found acceptable to the COTR. H. Work is completed, premises cleaned and ready for inspection, temporary facilities and services have been removed, and pre-existing conditions have been restored. I. All maintenance personnel have been properly instructed in the use of the facilities and all installed equipment as required by the Contract Documents. J. Contractor has released all property installed in the performance of the contract and all GFM not used has been transferred to the Contractor and delivered to place of origin. K. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 0-1
1.04
CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION (CAI)
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the date of the CAI with the COTR at least seven days in advance. B. The Contractor shall have the superintendent present at the CAI. The COTR shall conduct an inspection of the facility to verify all contract conditions are met. Any additional required test results shall be submitted to the COTR at this time. The COTR reserves the right to have local FAA personnel conduct additional tests to verify that operational requirements are met. The FAA reserves the right to have airport personnel present to document any concerns regarding final condition of the Site. 1.05 PUNCH LIST: The COTR shall furnish the Contractor with a list of discrepancies in the work, material, and equipment (punch list) that were noted during the CAI. The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies, if any, detected during the CAI before final acceptance. Work showing evidence of substandard performance will not be accepted and shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense. 1.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF WORK:
A. The Contractor shall correct discrepancies noted on the punch list prior to the final acceptance. The premises shall be thoroughly clean prior to final acceptance. The Contractor shall schedule final inspection and notify the COTR in writing seven days (or as otherwise agreed to) before the planned final inspection date. B. The Contractor shall have the superintendent present at the final inspection. The COTR shall conduct the final inspection of the facility to verify all contract conditions are met. C. Upon final acceptance by the COTR, the Contractor may submit Final Application for Payment to the Contracting Officer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 0-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the procedures for closeout submittals, revised project documents, and delivery and distribution of spare parts and maintenance manuals. 1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this section. A. Number of copies: Submit three (3) hard-bound manuals containing copies of manufacturer's literature, technical data, operating and maintenance instruction, service manuals and parts lists applicable to each item of equipment furnished. 1.03 PRODUCT WARRANTIES: All warranties under this contract shall continue for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work, unless otherwise stated. Two (2) original signed copies of each warranty are required. Each warranty shall contain complete information including the following: A. Product or work item. B. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone. C. Scope and limitations. D. Date of beginning warranty, which shall be date of final acceptance by the Government. E. Duration of warranty. In no cases shall the warranty be less than one year from the date of final acceptance by the Government. F. Information for owner's personnel to include proper procedure to evoke the warranty in case of failure, and for instances which might affect the validity of warranty. G. Contractor, name or responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS: Prior to final acceptance by the FAA, the Contractor shall furnish the COTR with as built record drawings. Approved detailed shop drawings submitted for review and approval are acceptable. Where shop drawings were not required, the Contractor shall provide engineering sketches detailing the installation. The information provided by as-built drawings, shop drawings or engineering sketches must provide adequate information for the revision of existing facility drawings. This information is to reflect the actual construction and installation of the equipment and materials under the terms of the contract.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00-1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1.05 SPARE PARTS: Prior to final acceptance by the FAA, the Contractor shall deliver to the COTR all spare parts as required by all other sections in this specification. All spare parts shall be delivered in original, unopened containers or packages. All packages shall be clearly labeled as to the type and number of parts enclosed. A complete listing of all spare parts provided shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. This list shall indicate a local source for additional spare parts. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED. EXECUTION -- NOT USED.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 02 41 19 SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes the requirements for selective building demolition including, but not limited to, the removal of membrane roofing and insulation, removal of HVAC equipment inclusive of roof curbs and ductwork, removal of acoustical ceiling tiles and grid, removal of gypsum board ceiling, removal of an exterior louver. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit the procedures proposed for the demolition and removal work. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal and disposition of materials designated to be salvaged, protection of property that is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection of utility services. A. Prior to any cutting, coring or demolition which affects the structural safety of the building, work of another contractor, existing occupied spaces or the safety of the public or FAA's employees, contractor shall submit written notice to FAA requesting consent to proceed with the work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Area affected. Reason for cutting, coring or demolition. Proposed method of cutting, coring or demolition and patching. Shop drawings, indicating work required. Methods of protecting exposed work, the public and FAA's employees.
B. Contractor is not to proceed with the work until the COTR has approved the submittals, inspected the protection provided, and given permission to proceed with the work. 1.03 PROTECTION: The Contractor shall provide and maintain protection for existing construction which is to remain, adjacent property, the public and FAAs employees. Provide and maintain temporary dust-tight protection, as approved by the COTR, for openings which separate that portion of FAAs existing occupancy (which will remain in operation during construction) from new construction areas. Temporary barriers shall be of noncombustible or flame retardant-treated materials. A. Where applicable, protection may be removed for working purposes and then replaced at end of each day's work. B. Temporary protection in the construction area shall remain in place until removal of such protection is authorized by the COTR. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS: Details of existing construction to be removed, altered, or reused are furnished by the FAA are for Contractor's convenience. The FAA assumes no responsibility of accuracy of details.
SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION
02 22 00-1
A. Items to Remain in Place: Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the COTR. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work. PART 2 Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION PRODUCTS
3.01 EXAMINATION: Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing work and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Any discrepancies between actual conditions and the drawings shall be promptly reported to the COTR. 3.02 PROTECTION: The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to insure against damage to existing work to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Any damage to such work shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Government. 3.03 DUST CONTROL: The dust resulting from removal shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the building. Use of water will not be permitted in interior locations, or when it will result in, or create, hazardous or objectionable conditions. At all times, all interior building equipment and materials shall be protected from dust. 3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform operations in such manner as to avoid hazards to persons and property and interference with the use of adjacent areas or interruption of free passage to and from such areas. Take care to prevent the spread of dust and flying particles. B. Execute cutting, coring demolition and debris removal work in a careful and orderly manner. Accumulation of rubbish will not be permitted. C. Restore work which has been cut or removed and install new products to provide completed work in accordance with contract requirements. D. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection of surfaces. E. No utilities shall be interrupted without first notifying the COTR and having his concurrence with the interruption. Provide temporary support for utilities whose support
02 22 00-2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT is disturbed by removal work. Coordinate with related trades any disconnecting and rerouting of existing services. 3.05 PATCHING: Where demolition leaves holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removal and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. 3.06 SALVAGE MATERIAL: All material removed shall become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the COTR.
**END OF SECTION**
02 22 00-3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT
SECTION 07 54 19 ADHERED THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements to install a complete adhered thermoplastic roofing system inclusive of membrane, flashings and all other necessary components. 1.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 1.03 RELATED WORK: The work includes but is not limited to the installation of: Removal of Existing Roofing and Insulation Substrate Preparation Roof Drains Vapor Barrier Wood Blocking Insulation Separation Layers Roof Membrane Fasteners Adhesive for Flashings Roof Membrane Flashings Walkways Metal Flashings Sealants QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The roofing system shall be applied only by a Roofing Applicator authorized by the Roofing Manufacturer prior to bid. All work pertaining to the installation of the roofing membrane and flashings shall only be completed by the Applicators employees trained and authorized by the Manufacturer in those procedures. B. Upon completion of the installation, the Applicator shall certify to the Manufacturer that all work has been done in strict accordance with the contract specifications and the Manufacturers requirements. A Manufacturers Technical Service Representative shall review the installed roof system and shall issue a Roofing System Warranty in accordance with these specifications. C. There shall be no deviation made from these specification, the Manufacturers instructions or the approved shop drawings without prior written approval by the COTR. 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. At the time of bidding, the Applicator shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1. Product data for each primary component to be used in the roofing system.
ADHERED THERMOPLASTIC MEMBERANE ROOFING
07 54 19 - 1
2. Samples of each primary component to be used in the roofing system 3. Written approval by the insulation manufacturer (as applicable) for use and performance of the product in the proposed system. 4. Sample copy of Warranty. 5. Sample copy of Applicator's Warranty. 6. Dimensioned shop drawings which shall include: a. b. c. Outline of roof with roof size and elevations shown. Details of flashing methods for penetrations. Technical acceptance from Roofing Manufacturer.
7. Certifications by manufacturers of roofing and insulating materials that all materials supplied comply with all requirements of the identified ASTM and other industry standards or practices. 8. Certification from the Applicator that the system specified meets all identified code and insurance requirements as required by this specification. 9. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 1.05 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Applicator shall submit evidence that the proposed roof system meets the requirements of the International Building Code and has been tested and approved or listed by the referenced test organizations. These requirements are minimum standards and no roofing work shall commence without written documentation of the system's compliance. B. System shall be designed to meet the minimum wind design requirements of the most recent version of ASCE 7. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All products delivered to the job site shall be in the original unopened containers or wrappings bearing all seals and approvals. B. Handle all materials to prevent damage. Place all materials on pallets and fully protect from moisture. C. Membrane rolls shall be stored lying down on pallets and fully protected from the weather with clean canvas tarpaulins. Unvented polyethylene tarpaulins are not accepted due to the accumulation of moisture beneath the tarpaulin in certain weather conditions that may affect the ease of membrane weldability. D. As a general rule all adhesives shall be stored at temperatures between 40 degree F (5 degree C) and 80 degree F (27 degree C). Read instructions contained on adhesive canister for specific storage instructions.
07 54 19 - 2
E. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions outlined on containers or supplied by material manufacturer/supplier. F. All materials which are determined to be damaged by the COTR or the manufacturers technical representative are to be removed from the job site and replaced at no cost to the FAA. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Roofing materials may be installed under certain adverse weather conditions but only after consultation with Manufacturers technical representative, as installation time and system integrity may be affected. B. Only as much of the new roofing as can be made weathertight each day, including all flashing and detail work, shall be installed. All seams shall be heat welded before leaving the job site that day. C. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing the interior building areas to the effects of inclement weather. The existing building and its contents shall be protected against all risks. D. All surfaces to receive new insulation, membrane or flashings shall be dry. Should surface moisture occur, the Applicator shall provide the necessary equipment to dry the surface prior to application. E. All new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, shall be secured in such a manner as to preclude wind blow-off and subsequent roof or equipment damage. F. Uninterrupted waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work and shall be completely removed before proceeding with the next day's work. Waterstops shall not emit dangerous or unsafe fumes and shall not remain in contact with the finished roof as the installation progresses. Contaminated membrane shall be replaced at no cost to the FAA. G. The Applicator is cautioned that certain roofing membranes are incompatible with asphalt, coal tar, heavy oils, roofing cements, creosote and some preservative materials. Such materials shall not remain in contact with roofing membranes. The Applicator shall consult roofing manufacturer regarding compatibility, precautions and recommendations. H. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing as a walking surface or for equipment movement and storage. Where such access is absolutely required, the Applicator shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. A substantial protection layer consisting of plywood over roofing membrane or plywood over insulation board shall be provided for all new and existing roof areas that receive rooftop traffic during construction. I. Prior to and during application, all dirt, debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces by vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air or similar methods.
07 54 19 - 3
J.
The Applicator shall follow all safety regulations as required by OSHA and any other applicable authority having jurisdiction.
K. All roofing, insulation, flashings and metal work removed during construction shall be immediately taken off site to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such materials. Hazardous materials, such as materials containing asbestos, are to be removed and disposed of in strict accordance with applicable City, State and Federal requirements. L. All new roofing waste material (i.e., scrap roof membrane, empty cans of adhesive) shall be immediately removed from the site by the Applicator and properly transported to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such material. M. The Applicator shall take precautions that storage and application of materials and equipment does not overload the roof deck or building structure. N. Flammable adhesives and deck primers shall not be stored and not be used in the vicinity of open flames, sparks and excessive heat. O. All rooftop contamination that is anticipated or that is occurring shall be reported to roofing manufacturers technical representative to determine the corrective steps to be taken. P. The Applicator shall verify that all roof drain lines are functioning correctly (not clogged or blocked) before starting work. Applicator shall report any such blockages in writing to the COTR for corrective action prior to the installation of the roof system. Q. Applicator shall immediately stop work if any unusual or concealed condition is discovered and shall immediately notify the COTR of such condition in writing for correction at the FAAs expense. R. Site cleanup, including both interior and exterior building areas that have been affected by construction, shall be completed to the satisfaction of the COTR. S. All landscaped areas damaged by construction activities shall be repaired at no cost to the FAA. T. The Applicator shall conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with the latest version of the SPRI/ANSI Fastener Pullout Standard to verify condition of the deck/substrate and to confirm expected pullout values. U. The roofing membrane shall not be installed under the following conditions without consulting the Manufacturers Technical Dept. for precautionary steps: 1. The roof assembly permits interior air to pressurize the membrane underside. 2. Any exterior wall has 10 percent or more of the surface area comprised of opening doors or windows. 3. The wall/deck intersection permits air entry into the wall flashing area. V. Precautions shall be taken when using adhesives at or near rooftop vents or air intakes. Adhesive odors could enter the building. Coordinate the operation of vents and air intakes in such a manner as to avoid the intake of adhesive odor while ventilating the building. Keep lids on unused cans at all times.
07 54 19 - 4
W. Personal protective equipment and/clothing shall be worn when using solvents or adhesives or as required by job conditions. X. Roofing membranes are slippery when wet or covered with snow, frost, or ice. Working on surfaces under these conditions is hazardous. Appropriate safety measures must be implemented prior to working on such surfaces. Always follow OSHA and other relevant fall protection standards when working on roofs. 1.08 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Bid Meeting: A pre-bid meeting shall be conducted by the FAA and shall include all trades to discuss all aspects of the project. The Applicator's field representative or roofing foreman for the work shall be in attendance. Procedures to avoid rooftop damage by other trades shall be determined. B. Site Visit: Bidders shall visit the site and carefully examine the areas in question as to conditions that may affect proper execution of the work. All dimensions and quantities shall be determined or verified by the Applicator. No claims for extra costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of the existing conditions unless agreed to in advance with the FAA. 1.08 WARRANTIES
A. Roofing System Warranty: Upon successful completion of the work to roofing manufacturers satisfaction and receipt of final payment, the Roofing System Warranty shall be issued. This Warranty shall be in effect for fifteen (15) years from the date of final acceptance by the FAA. B. Applicator/Roofing Contractor Warranty: The Applicator shall supply the FAA with a separate workmanship warranty. In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal is found to be within Applicator warranty term, defective or otherwise not in accordance with Contract Documents, the Applicator shall repair that defect at no cost to the FAA. Applicator's warranty obligation shall run directly to the FAA, and a copy shall be sent to the Roofing Manufacturer. This Warranty shall be in effect for two (2) years from the date of final acceptance by the FAA. C. Owner Responsibility: Owner shall notify both Sika Sarnafil and the Applicator of any leaks as they occur during the time period when both warranties are in effect. PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A. Known Acceptable Products: Provide products of Sika Sarnafil or approved equal. All products referenced herein are products of Sika Sarnafil. The Contractor may submit products of a different manufacturer provided he is able to demonstrate that the proposed products possess equivalent or superior salient features.
07 54 19 - 5
B. The components of the Sarnafil Adhered roof system are to be products of Sika Sarnafil as indicated on the Detail Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents, or an approved equal. C. Components to be used that are other than those supplied or manufactured by Sika Sarnafil may be submitted for review and acceptance by Sika Sarnafil. Sika Sarnafil's acceptance of any other product is only for a determination of compatibility with Sika Sarnafil products and not for inclusion in the Sika Sarnafil warranty. The specifications, installation instructions, limitations, and restrictions of the respective manufacturers must be reviewed by the FAA for acceptability for the intended use with Sika Sarnafil products. D. Condensation or moisture migration into the roof system must be controlled so that it does not compromise the performance of the insulation and other components of the assembly. Moisture vapor tends to migrate from warmer to cooler areas. Air/vapor retarders are used to inhibit or block the flow of warm moist air into the roof system. To determine if an air/vapor barrier is necessary, a design professional with experience with air handling and moisture control should be consulted. 2.02 MEMBRANE
A. Provide Sarnafil G410-15, 60 mil (1.5 mm) thermoplastic membrane with fiberglass reinforcement with a lacquer coating. B. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434 (latest version), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing". Classification: Type II, Grade I. C. Color of Membrane: Provide EnergySmart (white), initial reflectivity of 0.83, initial emissivity 0.90, solar reflective index (SRI) of >104.
07 54 19 - 6
Typical Physical Properties ASTM Test Method Parameters Reinforcing Material Overall Thickness, min., inches (mm) Tensile Strength, min., psi (MPa) Elongation at Break, min. (machine x tranverse) Seam strength(2), min. (% of tensile strength) Retention of Properties After Heat Aging Tensile Strength, min., (% of original) Elongation, min., (% of original) Tearing Resistance, min., lbf (N) Low Temperature Bend, -40 F (-40 C) Accelerated Weathering Test (Xenon Arc) Cracking (7x magnification) Discoloration (by observation) Crazing (7 x magnification) Linear Dimensional Change Weight Change After Immersion in Water Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbf (15 kg) Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 7.3 ft-lbf (10 J) Initial Solar Reflectance Emissivity Solar Reflective Index (SRI) Recycled Content (5 & 10 ft. sheets only) D638 D638 D638 D638 D3045 D638 D638 D1004 D2136 D2565 D1204 D570 D5602 D5635 Minimum ASTM Requirement Sarnafil Typical Physical Properties Fiberglass [0.0 inches)] 1600 (11.1) 270% / 250% 80 95 90 14 (63.0) Pass Pass None Negligible None 0.02% 2.5% Pass Pass
0.045 (1.14) 1500 (10.4) 250% / 230% 75 90 90 10 (45.0) Pass 5,000 Hours None Negligible None 0.10 % 3.0% Pass Pass
E903 0.83 E408, C1371, 0.90 Other E1980 104 Up to 12% Pre-Consumer / Up to 1% Post Consumer.
*Failure occurs through membrane rupture not seam failure.
07 54 19 - 7
2.03 A.
FLASHING MATERIALS Wall/Curb Flashing 1. Sarnaclad: A PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 24 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (0.5 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions of Sarnaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 m x 3.0 m). Sarnaclad: A PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 24 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (0.5 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions of Sarnaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 m x 3.0 m). Sarnaflash: A prefabricated expansion joint cover made from Sarnafil membrane. Sarnaflash is designed for securement to vertical or horizontal surfaces to span and accommodate the movement of new and existing expansion gaps from 1 inch to 4-1/2 inches (25 mm to 114 mm) across. Available in 40 foot (12 m) rolls. Sarnareglet: A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and large curbs. Sarnareglet is produced from 6063-T5, 0.10 inch to 0.12 inch (2.5 mm to 3.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Sarnareglet has a 2-1/4 inch (57 mm) deep profile, and is provided in 10 foot (3 m) lengths. Use prefabricated Sarnareglet mitered inside and outside corners where walls intersect. Sarnastack: A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048 inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick Sarnafil G410 membrane. Sarnadrain-RAC: PVC-coated, heavy-duty aluminum roof drain insert that mechanically seals to the drainpipe interior. Sarnadrain-RAC is made of 0.080 inch (2 mm) thick 6063 aluminum with a urethane seal installed at the end of the drainpipe. The large 14 inch x 14 inch (0.36 m x 0.36 m) drain strainer is also made of 0.080 inch (2 mm) thick aluminum stock. The flange dimensions of Sarnadrain-RAC are 18 inches x 18 inches (0.46 m x 0.46 m). Sarnacircle-"G": Circular 0.048 inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick G410 membrane patch welded over T-joints formed by overlapping thick membranes. Sarnacorners Universal: Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060 inch (60 mil/1.5 mm) thick membrane that are heat-welded to membrane or Sarnaclad base flashings. Multi-Purpose Sealant: A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Sarnacol 2165 Adhesive: A two-component urethane adhesive used for pitch pocket filler.
B.
Perimeter Edge Flashing 1.
C.
Miscellaneous Flashing 1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
07 54 19 - 8
9.
Sarnacol 2170 Adhesive: A solvent-based reactivating-type adhesive used to attach membrane to flashing substrate.
10. Sarnafelt: A non-woven polyester or polypropylene mat cushion layer that is necessary behind G410 or G459 Flashing Membrane when the flashing substrates are rough or incompatible with the flashing membrane. 2.04 A. INSULATION/OVERLAYMENT/RECOVER BOARD Sarnatherm EXPS: Extruded polystyrene closed-cell foam insulation. Available in 4 ft x 4 ft (1.2 m x 1.2 m) or 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) sizes and various thicknesses. A one inch minimum isocyanurate or gypsum based thermal barrier must be placed between styrene boards and Sarnafil membrane. Not allowed direct to steel deck for FM insured buildings, an approved thermal barrier must be installed between the EXPS and deck. . DensDeck DuraGuard: Fire-tested, gypsum hardboard with a durable glass-mat facer coating. DuraGuard is provided in a 4 x 8 ft (1.2 x 2.4 m) board size and in thicknesses of 1/4, 1/2, and 5/8 inch (6, 13 and 16 mm). ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Membrane Adhesive 1. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive: A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to horizontal or near-horizontal substrates. Application rates are as follows:
B.
2.05
SARNACOL 2121 APPLICATION RATES FOR BARE BACK MEMBRANE Adhesive Rates Gallons per 100 Square Feet Approximate Sq. Ft./Pail (Liters per Meter) (meter) Substrate Membrane Total Isocyanurate Paper 1.50 Facer 1.50 (0.61) + 0 = (0.61) 333 (30.94) 1.50 Smooth Plywood 1.50 (0.61) + 0 = 333 (30.94) (0.61) 1.25 1.25 (051) + 0 = 400 (37.16) GP DensDeck Prime (0.51) 2. Notes: a. There is a significant increase in drying time due to an increase in humidity or a decrease in temperature. Do not install when outdoor or substrate temperatures during drying period are expected to fall below 40 degree F (5 degree C). b. Do not allow Sarnacol 2121 adhesive to skin-over or surface-dry prior to installation of membrane. c. Use a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press the membrane into the adhesive layer.
07 54 19 - 9
B.
Insulation Board Adhesive 1. Sarnacol 2163 Adhesive: A low odor, VOC compliant, one step, low-rise urethane foam used to attach insulation to approved compatible substrates. Adhesive is applied with a gravity fed applicator or by hand with a dual component caulk gun. Additional adhesive may be required for rougher surfaces. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. Application rate is as follows: a. Coverage - Approximately 600 square feet (55.7 square m) per case. Rates are based on an application pattern of 4 ribbons, 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm) beads, 12 inches (30 cm) on center per 4 x 4 feet (121.9 x 121.9 cm) insulation board. Coverage rates may vary over irregular surfaces. Notes: (1) Not recommended for use with insulation boards larger than 4x4 feet (1.2x1.2 m). (2) Place insulation board into the adhesive shortly after it has reached its maximum rise [typically within 30 to 45 seconds at 60 to 80 degree F (16 to 27 degree C)] and walk into place. (3) Minimum product temperature before entering the dispenser should be 70 degree F (21 degree C). (4) Store between 60 degree F (16 degree C) and 80 degree F (27 degree C). (5) Adhesive shall not be used during inclement weather. (6) Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. (7) A minimum of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 feet (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 inches (305 mm) on center to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Sarnafil roof membrane. The Sarnabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it.
b.
2.
Sarnacol 2164 Adhesive: A low odor, VOC compliant, single component, lowrise urethane foam used to attach insulation to approved compatible substrates. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. Application rate is as follows: a. Coverage - Approximately 500 to 600 square feet (46.4 to 55.7 square m) per 3 gallons (11.3 L) unit. Rates are based on an application using a ribbon pattern, 1/2 to 3/4 inch (13 to 19 mm) wide beads, 12 inches (30 cm) on center per 4 x 4 feet (121.9 x 121.9 cm) insulation board. Coverage rates may vary over irregular surfaces. Notes: (1) Not recommended for use with insulation boards larger than 4x4 feet (1.2x1.2 m). (2) Place insulation board into wet adhesive immediately. (3) Adhesive shall not be used during inclement weather. (4) Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. (5) A minimum of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 feet (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 inches (305 mm) on center to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Sarnafil roof
b.
07 54 19 - 10
membrane. The Sarnabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it. C. Sarnaplate: Used with various Sarnafasteners to attach insulation boards to roof deck. Sarnaplate is a 3 inch (75 mm) square or round, 26 gauge stamping of SAE 1010 steel with an AZ 55 Galvalume coating. Sarnaplate-HD/CD: Used with Sarnafastener-HD or Sarnafastener-CD10 to attach insulation boards to wood or concrete roof decks. Sarnaplate-HD/CD is a 3 inch (75 mm) round stamping of SAE 1010 steel with an AZ 55 Galvalume coating. Sarnaplate-Preassembled: Combination of a 3 inch round plate and a #12 fastener used to attach insulation boards to steel or wood roof decks. Sarnaplate-Preassembled consists of a 3 inch (75 mm) round, 26 gauge stamping of SAE 1010 steel with an AZ 55 Galvalume coating and Sarnafastener #12 with modified buttress thread. The fastener shank diameter is approximately 0.168 inch (4 mm) and the thread diameter is approximately 0.214 inch (5 mm). Sarnafastener #12: A #12 corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnaplates to attach insulation boards to steel or wood roof decks. Sarnafastener #12 has a modified buttress thread, a shank diameter of approximately 0.168 inch (4 mm) and a thread diameter of approximately 0.214 inch (5 mm). The driving head has a diameter of approximately 0.435 inch (11 mm) with a #3 Phillips recess for positive engagement. Sarnafastener-HD: A #14 corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnaplate-HD/CD to attach insulation boards or with Sarnadisc and Sarnabar to attach membrane to structural concrete or wood roof decks. Sarnafastener-HD has a shank diameter of 0.190 inch (4.8 mm), a thread diameter of 0.245 inch (6.2 mm) and a #3 Phillips drive head with a diameter of 0.435 inch (11 mm). Sarnafastener-XP: A #15, heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnaplate to attach insulation or Sarnastop and Sarnabar to attach Sarnafil G410 roof membrane to steel or wood roof decks. Sarnafastener-XP has a shank diameter of approximately 0.21 inch (5.3 mm) and the thread diameter is approximately 0.26 inch (6.6 mm). The driving head has a diameter of approximately 0.435 inch (11 mm) with a #3 Phillips recess for positive engagement. Sarnafastener-XPS: A specially designed, heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnastop or Sarnabar to attach Sarnafil G410 roof membrane to steel roof decks. Sarnafastener-XPS has a shank diameter of approximately 0.21 inch (5.3mm) and a thread diameter of approximately 0.26 inch (6.6). The driving head has a diameter of approximately 0.435 inch (11 mm) with a #3 Phillips recess for positive engagement and simplicity of application. Sarnafastener-CD10: A nail-in, corrosion-resistant fastener used with SarnaplateHD/CD, Sarnastop or Sarnabar to attach insulation or membrane to normal weight concrete roof deck. Sarnafastener-CD10 has a shank diameter of 0.215 inch (5.5 mm), a split diameter of 0.265/0.275 inch (6.7/7.0 mm) and a flat head with a 0.435 inch (11 mm) diameter.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
07 54 19 - 11
K.
Sarnastop: An extruded aluminum, low profile bar used with certain Sarnafasteners to attach to the roof deck or to walls/curbs at terminations, penetrations and at incline changes of the substrate. Sarnastop is a 1 inch (25 mm) wide, flat aluminum bar 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick that has predrilled holes every 6 inches (152 mm) on center. Sarnabar: An FM-approved, heavy-duty, 14 gauge, galvanized or stainless, roll-formed steel bar used to attach membrane to roof decks. The formed steel is pre-punched with holes every 1 inch (25 mm) on center to allow various Sarnafastener spacing options.
L.
M. Sarnacord: A 5/32 inch (4 mm) diameter, red-colored, flexible thermoplastic extrusion that is welded to the top surface of the Sarnafil membrane and against the side of the Sarnabar, used to hold the membrane in position. 2.06 A. DECK PRIMERS Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer WB: A water-based primer designed for use with Sarnavap Self-Adhered vapor barrier to promote adhesion to most substrates. Particularly recommended when use of solvent-based primer is not advised or permitted. WALKWAY PROTECTION A. Sarnatred: A polyester reinforced, 0.096 inch (96 mil/2.4 mm), weldable membrane with surface embossment. Used as a protection layer from rooftop traffic. Sarnatred is supplied in rolls of 39.3 inches (1.0 m) wide and 32.8 feet (10 m) long. Install in areas as shown on the drawings or as directed by the COTR. VAPOR BARRIER A. Sarnavap-10: A 10 mil (0.25 mm) thick polyethylene vapor barrier/air barrier. Sarnavap-10 is supplied in a folded panel that is rolled onto a core. The core width is 5 feet (1.5 m). When unrolled off the core and unfolded, the sheet dimensions are 20 feet (6.9 m) wide by 100 feet (33 m) long. Sarnavap Self-Adhered: A 32 mil (0.8 mm) self-adhesive vapor barrier that can also serve as temporary roof protection. Sarnavap Self-Adhered is available in rolls 44.9 inches x 133.8 feet (1.14 x 40.8 m). MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Tape: A 2 inch (50 mm) wide pressure-sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between small areas of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as a bond-breaker under the coverstrip at Sarnaclad joints. Sealing Tape Strip: Compressible foam with pressure-sensitive adhesive on one side. Used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. Multi-Purpose Tape: A high performance sealant tape used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. Sarnamatic 641mc or 661: 220 volt, self-propelled, hot-air welding machine used to seal Sarnafil membrane seams.
2.07
2.08
B.
2.09
B.
C. D.
07 54 19 - 12
E.
Sarnasolv: A high quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt, scuff marks, etc., from the membrane surface. Sarnasolv is also used daily to clean seam areas prior to hot-air welding in tear off or dirty conditions or if the membrane is not welded the same day it is unrolled. Perimeter Warning Tape: Designed for use on PVC membranes as a reflective, highly visible pressure sensitive tape used to draw attention to roof perimeters and potential hazardous areas. The tape is available in 2 inch wide rolls by 30 feet long and comes on a release liner for easy application. Perimeter Warning Tape exceeds reflectivity 3 requirements and Federal spec. L-S-300, Class 1. SEALANTS AND PITCH POCKET FILLERS
F.
2.10 A. B. C.
Sarnafil Multi-Purpose Sealant (for termination details). Sarnacol 2165 Adhesive (two-component urethane adhesive for pitch pocket toppings). Depending on substrates, the following sealants are options for temporary overnight tie-ins: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type III hot asphalt conforming to ASTM D312 (latest version). Sarnacol 2165 Adhesive. Multiple layers of roofing cement and felt. Spray-applied, water-resistant urethane foam. Mechanical attachment with rigid bars and compressed sealant.
2.11 A.
MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS All fasteners, anchors, nails, straps, bars, etc. shall be post-galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in such a manner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry shall be expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete fasteners and anchors shall have a minimum embedment of 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchors used for flashings shall have a minimum embedment of 1 inch (25 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. RELATED MATERIALS A. Wood Nailer: Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the entire roof and around such other roof projections and penetrations as specified on Project Drawings. Thickness of nailers must match the insulation thickness to achieve a smooth transition. Wood nailers shall be treated for fire and rot resistance (wolmanized or osmose treated) and be #2 quality or better lumber. Creosote or asphalt-treated wood is not acceptable. Wood nailers shall conform to Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. All wood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19 percent by weight on a dry-weight basis. 1. Note: Wood nailers or wood blocking for snow protection system shall be installed prior to the installation of the roof membrane whenever possible.
2.12
07 54 19 - 13
B.
Plywood: When bonding directly to plywood, a minimum 1/2 inch (12 mm) CDX (C side out), smooth-surfaced exterior grade plywood with exterior grade glue shall be used. Rough-surfaced plywood or high fastener heads will require the use of Sarnafelt behind the flashing membrane. Plywood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19 percent by weight on a dry weight basis. EXECUTION
PART 2 3.01 A. B.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE The Applicator and Manufacturers Technical Representative shall attend a preconstruction conference conducted by the FAA COTR. The meeting shall discuss all aspects of the project including but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Safety Set up
Construction schedule
Contract conditions Coordination of the work
3.02 A. B.
SUBSTRATE CONDITION Applicator shall be responsible for acceptance or provision of proper substrate to receive new roofing materials. Applicator shall verify that the work done under related sections meets the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Roof drains and scuppers have been reconditioned or replaced and installed properly. Roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof penetrations are properly secured and prepared to receive new roofing materials. All surfaces are smooth and free of dirt, debris and incompatible materials. All roof surfaces shall be free of water, ice and snow.
3.03
A.
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION The roof deck and existing roof construction must be structurally sound to provide support for the new roof system. The Applicator shall load materials on the rooftop in such a manner as to eliminate risk of deck overload due to concentrated weight. The COTR shall ensure that the roof deck is secured to the structural framing according to local building code and in such a manner as to resist all anticipated wind loads in that location. 1. Poured Structural Concrete Deck: a. The roof deck shall be smooth, even, free of dust, dirt, excess moisture or oil and be structurally sound. Sharp ridges, other projections and accumulations of bitumen above the surface shall be removed to ensure a smooth surface before roofing. Any deteriorated decking shall be repaired.
B.
Reroofing with Removal of Existing Single-Ply Roofing
07 54 19 - 14
1.
The COTR and Applicator shall determine the condition of the roof deck and existing insulation. Deteriorated decking or wet or deteriorated materials are to be removed and replaced. After removal of single-ply roof, inspect insulation boards and reuse only if dry and in stable condition. Add a Sika Sarnafil approved recover board or new insulation board. Fasten recover board or top layer of insulation in accordance with Sika Sarnafil's requirements.
3.04 A. B.
SUBSTRATE INSPECTION A dry, clean and smooth substrate shall be prepared to receive the Sarnafil Adhered roof system. The Applicator shall inspect the substrate for defects such as excessive surface roughness, contamination, structural inadequacy, or any other condition that will adversely affect the quality of work. The substrate shall be clean, smooth, dry, free of flaws, sharp edges, loose and foreign material, oil and grease. Roofing shall not start until all defects have been corrected. All roof surfaces shall be free of water, ice and snow. Sarnafil shall be applied over compatible and accepted substrates only. VAPOR BARRIER/AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
C. D. E. 3.05
General Criteria: Interior (inside temperature/relative humidity) and exterior conditions may create a need for a vapor barrier. The design professional shall decide whether a vapor barrier is necessary. It is the design professional's responsibility to determine the type and location of a vapor barrier. If sealed properly, a vapor barrier can also act as an air barrier (positive pressure) for roofs intended over air-permeable decks (steel, wood, precast, etc.). When reroofing over the existing asphalt roof, the old roof may be considered to be an adequate vapor barrier/air barrier if the details are properly sealed. Sarnavap Self-Adhered 1. Primer Application a. The substrate must be clean, dry and free of dust, grease or other contaminants. Shake well before using. Apply to clean and dry surfaces with a paint brush, roller or sprayer. Application rates will vary depending on substrate. Sarnavap Self-Adhered vapor barrier must be installed on the same day as the primer application. Acceptable substrates for primer application include wood, concrete, lightweight concrete, gypsum boards and decks, and DensDeck boards. Drying time is typically 30 minutes to 3 hours. Spraying equipment recommendations: (1) Spray tip size: between 20 and 25 mils. (2) Pressure: 1300 psi continuous To Install: (1) Apply primer to prepared substrate. (2) Allow primer to dry completely.
B.
b.
c.
07 54 19 - 15
(3) d.
Install Sarnavap Self-Adhered vapor barrier.
Notes: (1) Do not install when it is raining, snowing, or on wet/humid surfaces. (2) Install Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer at temperatures 32 degree F (0 degree C) and above. Average coverage rate is 0.25 to 1.22 gallons per square (0.1 to 0.5 L per m). (3) Install Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer WB at temperatures 41 degree F (5 degree C) and above. Average coverage rate is 0.25 to 0.75 gallon per square (0.1 to 0.3 L per m). KEEP FROM FREEZING. (4) Do not use Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer WB to seal Sarnavap SelfAdhered vapor barrier membrane joints. (5) Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer WB is not suitable for plastic surfaces. (6) Do not use Sarnavap Self-Adhered Primer WB on asphaltic boards.
2.
Membrane Application Over Steel, Wood or Concrete Deck (New Construction or Reroofing with Removal of Existing Roofing): a. Install Sarnavap Self-Adhered over a clean and dry substrate. In concrete applications allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days. Do not install when it is raining, snowing, or on wet/humid surfaces. Install in temperatures 32 degree F (0 degree C) and above. The use of a primer is required on the following substrates: wood, concrete, lightweight concrete, gypsum boards and decks, and DensDeck boards. On metal decks use a metal plate (6 x 42 inches - 15 x 106 cm) to support the membrane end lap between metal flutes ensuring a complete end lap seal. Begin application at the bottom of the slope. Unroll Sarnavap Self-Adhered onto the substrate without adhering for alignment. Overlap each preceding sheet by 3 inches (75 mm) lengthwise following the reference line and by 6 inches (150 mm) at each end. Stagger end laps by at least 12 inches (300 mm). Do not immediately remove the silicone release sheet. Once aligned, peel back a portion of the silicone release sheet and press the membrane onto the substrate for initial adherence. Hold Sarnavap SelfAdhered tight and peel back the release sheet by pulling diagonally. Use a 75 lb. (34 kg) roller to press Sarnavap Self-Adhered down into the substrate including the laps. Finish by aligning the edge of the roller with the lower end of the side laps and rolling up the membrane. Do not cut the membrane to remove air bubbles trapped under the laps. Squeeze out air bubbles by pushing the roller to the edge of the laps.
b.
c.
d.
3.06 A. B.
WOOD NAILER INSTALLATION Install continuous wood nailers at the perimeter of the entire roof and around roof projections and penetrations as shown on the Shop Drawings. Nailers shall be anchored to resist a minimum force of 300 pounds per lineal foot (4,500 Newtons per lineal meter) in any direction. Individual nailer lengths shall not be less than 3 feet (0.9 meter) long. Nailer fastener spacing shall be at 12 inches (0.3 m) on center or 16 inches (0.4 m) on center if necessary to match the structural
07 54 19 - 16
framing. Fasteners shall be staggered 1/3 the nailer width and installed within 6 inches (0.15 m) of each end. Two fasteners shall be installed at ends of nailer lengths. Nailer attachment shall also meet the requirements of the current Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. D. Thickness shall be as required to match substrate or insulation height to allow a smooth transition. Any existing nailer woodwork which is to remain shall be firmly anchored in place to resist a minimum force of 300 pounds per lineal foot (4,500 Newtons per lineal meter) in any direction and shall be free of rot, excess moisture or deterioration. Only woodwork shown to be reused in the Shop Drawings shall be left in place. All other nailer woodwork shall be removed. Stainless steel, corrosion resistant, fasteners are required when mechanically attaching any Sika Sarnafil product to wood nailers and wood products treated with ACQ (Alkaline copper Quaternary). When ACQ treated wood is used on steel roof decks or with metal edge detailing, a separation layer must be placed between the metal and ACQ treated wood. INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General Criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Insulation shall be installed according to insulation manufacturer's instructions. Insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around penetrations and projections. Install tapered insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's shop drawings. Install tapered insulation around drains creating a drain sump. Do not install more insulation board than can be covered with Sarnafil membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. Use at least 2 layers of insulation when the total insulation thickness exceeds 21/2 inches (64 mm). Stagger joints at least 12 inches (0.3 m) between layers. Mechanical Attachment a. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deck with approved fasteners and plates at a rate according to the insulation manufacturer's and Sika Sarnafil's recommendations for fastening rates and patterns. The quantity and locations of the fasteners and plates shall also cause the insulation boards to rest evenly on the roof deck/substrate so that there are no significant and avoidable air spaces between the boards and the substrate. Each insulation board shall be installed tightly against the adjacent boards on all sides. Fasteners are to be installed consistently in accordance with fastener manufacturer's recommendations. Fasteners are to have minimum penetration into structural deck recommended by the fastener manufacturer and Sika Sarnafil. Use fastener tools with a depth locator and torque-limiting attachment as recommended or supplied by fastener manufacturer to ensure proper installation.
E.
3.07
b.
c.
8.
Sarnacol 2163 Adhesive 07 54 19 - 17
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
With a utility knife, cut away the plastic plugs from the Sarnacol 2163 mixing head. Attach a mixing tip to the threaded mixing head. Place the cartridge into the applicator. At the beginning of the tube, some of the material should be pumped out initially to make sure of a proper mix. Apply using a gravity fed applicator or by hand with a dual component caulk gun over properly installed and prepared substrates in bands 12 inches (305 mm) on center. Bands are 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm) wide before foaming. Adhesive will quickly, within 30 to 45 seconds at 60 to 80 degree F (15 to 27 degree C), transform from a liquid into a low rise foam. Immediately set insulation boards into wet adhesive. Do not allow the adhesive to skin over. Walk insulation boards into place to ensure full embedment. Within 5 to 15 minutes the boards are securely attached to the substrate. In warmer weather this process is a little quicker. In colder weather the process is a little slower. CAUTION: Walking insulation boards in immediately after placement into adhesive may cause slippage/movement until adhesive starts to set up. On roof slopes greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), begin adhering insulation at low point and work upward to avoid slippage. One person should be designated to walk in, trim/slit and apply weight to all insulation boards to ensure adequate securement. Only areas that can be made completely watertight in the same days operations shall be coated. Un-used adhesive can be applied at a later date by simply replacing the mixing tip. For multiple layers of insulation spray adhesive over the base layer once fully secured and follow procedures above for attachment of each insulation layer. Approved Insulation Boards: (1) Sarnatherm Polyisocyanurate, 1 inch (25 mm) minimum thickness (required for Systems Warranty). (2) Accepted, one inch minimum, Polyisocyanurate. (3) DensDeck (4) Approved polystyrene insulation (EPS/EXPS) overlaid with a recovery board. (5) If plywood or OSB is proposed as a membrane underlayment, a polyisocyanurate composite board shall be used. Individual plywood or OSB panels are not recommended due to board stiffness and potential for bowing. Approved Substrate/Deck: (1) Structural Roof Decking: Concrete, Gypsum, Cemetitious Wood Fiber (Tectum), Wood or Steel. (2) Base sheets: Standard or Granular surfaced. (3) Smooth Built-Up Roof Surfaces: Re-Roof Applications. Installation Guidelines: (1) Not recommended for use with insulation boards larger than 4x4 feet (1.2x1.2 m). (2) For ease of application, maintain a minimum material temperature of 70 degree F (21 degree C) prior to use.
07 54 19 - 18
(3)
f.
g.
Store between 60 degree F (16 degree C) and 80 degree F (27 degree C). (4) Adhesive shall not be used during inclement weather. (5) Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. (6) Do not use warped or curled insulation boards. (7) For uneven surfaces, trimming or slitting of boards may be necessary. (8) Approximate Set-Time: (a) Air Temperature between 60 to 90 degree F (15 to 32 degree C) = 5 to 8 minutes. (b) Air Temperature between 32 to 60 degree F (0 to 15 degree C) = 8 to 15 minutes. (9) Coverage: (a) Approximately 600 square feet per case. Rates are based on an application pattern of 4 ribbons, 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm) beads, 12 inches (30 cm) on center per 4 x 4 feet (121.9 x 121.9 cm) insulation board. Coverage rates may vary over irregular surfaces. (10) A minimum of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 feet (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 inches (305 mm) on center to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Sarnafil roof membrane. The Sarnabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it. Approved Insulation Boards Adhered to Approved Roof Substrate/Deck: (1) Sarnatherm Polyisocyanurate, 1 inch minimum (25 mm) thickness (required for Systems Warranty). (2) Accepted, one inch minimum, Polyisocyanurate. (3) DensDeck (4) Approved polystyrene insulation EXPS overlaid with a recovery board. (5) A minimum of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 feet (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 inches (305 mm) on center to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Sarnafil roof membrane. The Sarnabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it. Installation Guidelines: (1) Adhesive must be applied as a continuous layer. (2) Use a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press insulation into adhesive layer. (3) Storage temperatures in excess of 90 degree F (32 degree C) may affect shelf life of adhesive. (4) If exposed to temperatures below 40 degree F (5 degree C), restored adhesive to a minimum temperature of 60 degree F (15 degree C) before use. (5) Job site conditions may affect performance. Adhesive shall not be used if surface or ambient temperatures below 40 degree F (5 degree C) are expected during application or subsequent curing time.
07 54 19 - 19
(6) 3.08
A.
Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces.
INSTALLATION OF SARNAFIL MEMBRANE The surface of the insulation or substrate shall be inspected prior to installation of the Sarnafil roof membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged insulation boards shall be removed and replaced. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive: 1. Over the properly installed and prepared substrate, Sarnacol 2121 adhesive shall be poured out of the pail and spread using notched 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 inch (6 x 6 x 6 mm) squeegees. The adhesive shall be applied at a rate according to Sika Sarnafil requirements (no adhesive is placed on back of the membrane). The formation of a film on the surface of the adhesive shall not be allowed to occur. The membrane shall be carefully unrolled into the wet adhesive while the edges are overlapped 3 inches (75 mm). The membrane shall be pressed firmly into the adhesive layer with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. Notes: a. Sarnacol 2121 shall not be used if temperatures below 40 degree F (5 degree C) are expected during application or subsequent drying time. b. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas. All membrane shall be applied in the same manner. c. Sarnacol 2121 shall not be used on vertical surfaces or sloped surfaces greater than a 2 inch (50 mm) rise per 1 horizontal foot (0.3 m).
B.
2.
3.09 A.
HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS General 1. All seams shall be hot-air welded. Seam overlaps should be 3 inches (75 mm) wide when automatic machine-welding and 4 inches (100 mm) wide when handwelding, except for certain details. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Sika Sarnafil. All mechanics intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course provided by a Sika Sarnafil Technical Service Representative prior to welding. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry. Hand-welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Hot-air welding equipment shall be allowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to welding. The back edge of the seam shall be welded with a narrow but continuous weld to prevent loss of hot air during the final welding. The nozzle shall be inserted into the seam at a 45 degree angle to the edge of the membrane. Once the proper welding temperature has been reached and the membrane begins to "flow, the hand roller is positioned perpendicular to the nozzle and rolled lightly. For straight seams, the 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) wide nozzle
2.
3. B. 1. 2. 3.
Hand-Welding
07 54 19 - 20
is recommended for use. For corners and compound connections, the 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide nozzle shall be used. C. Machine Welding 1. Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of Sika Sarnafil's automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, Sika Sarnafil's instructions shall be followed and local codes for electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicated circuit house power or a dedicated portable generator is recommended. No other equipment shall be operated simultaneously off the generator. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and under the machine welder to minimize or eliminate wrinkles. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark grey material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily by the Applicator at locations as directed by the COTR or Sika Sarnafil's representative. One inch (25 mm) wide cross-section samples of welded seams shall be taken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of the membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator at no extra cost to the FAA.
2. D.
Quality Control of Welded Seams 1.
3.10 A.
MEMBRANE FLASHINGS All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the COTR and Sika Sarnafil. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent-resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. Sarnacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques.
B.
2.
C.
Install Sarnastop/Sarnabar/Sarnacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnastop is
07 54 19 - 21
required by Sika Sarnafil at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according to Sika Sarnafil's details. D. Sika Sarnafil's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by Sika Sarnafil prior to installation. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (0.2 m) above roofing level unless otherwise accepted in writing by the COTR and Sika Sarnafil Technical Department. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot-air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the flashing membrane. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter-flashed top edge with Sarnastop at 6 to 8 inches (0.15 to 0.20 m) on center. Sarnafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sika Sarnafil recommended details. All flashings that exceed 30 inches (0.75 m) in height shall receive additional securement. Consult Sika Sarnafil Technical Department for securement methods. SARNACLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL
A.
E. F.
G. H. I. 3.11
All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sika Sarnafil. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Sarnaclad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Shop Drawings. 1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches (100 mm) on center staggered. Fasteners shall penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction.
B.
2.
C.
Adjacent sheets of Sarnaclad shall be spaced 1/4 inch (6 mm) apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 inch (50 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch minimum (100 mm) wide strip of Sarnafil flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded over the joint. Exercise caution at perimeter of roof. Workers shall follow OSHA safety procedures. WALKWAY INSTALLATION
3.12 A.
Sarnatred Walkway 1. Roofing membrane to receive Sarnatred Walkway shall be clean and dry. Place chalk lines on deck sheet to indicate location of Walkway. Apply a continuous coat of Sarnacol 2170 adhesive to the deck sheet and the back of Walkway in accordance with Sika Sarnafil's technical requirements and press Walkway into place with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller. Clean the deck membrane in areas to be welded. Hot-air weld the entire perimeter of the Walkway to the 07 54 19 - 22
Sarnafil deck sheet. Check all welds with a rounded screwdriver. Re-weld any inconsistencies. Important: Check all existing deck membrane seams that are to be covered by Walkway with rounded screwdriver and reweld any inconsistencies before Walkway installation. Do not run Walkway over Sarnabars. 3.13
A.
PERIMETER WARNING TAPE Areas of membrane where tape is to be applied must be cleaned to a like new condition. Failure to properly clean the membrane will result in less than satisfactory adhesion. The membrane should be cleaned as follows:
1.
2.
New membrane: Remove loose dirt and dust by wiping clean with water. For areas where dirt is embedded, scrub the application area with a commercial cleaner such as Simple Green, 409 or other similar all purpose cleaner using a Scotch Brite scrubbing pad or similar product. Wash away residual cleaning material with clean water. Weathered membrane: For older membranes or areas where there is excessive dirt buildup, use the above cleaning procedure followed by cleaning with a natural fiber rag wet with MEK, and wipe away all residual cleaning solution and remaining dirt until membrane has a like new appearance. a. After surface is clean and dry, apply tape to surface taking care to avoid trapping air and creating blisters as tape is smoothed over with hand pressure. If a chalk line is used be sure to keep chalk dust clear of application area. b. Do not apply Perimeter Warning Tape to surfaces where the temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Perimeter Warning Tape may be slippery when wet.
3.14 A.
TEMPORARY CUT-OFF All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to provide a 100 percent watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. Waterstop shall be sealed to the deck or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a continuous heavy application of sealant as described in Section 2.10. When work resumes, the contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly-completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. COMPLETION
B.
C. 3.15
07 54 19 - 23
A. Prior to demobilization from the site, the work shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative and the Applicator. All defects noted and non-compliances with the Specifications or the recommendations of Sika Sarnafil shall be itemized in a punch list. These items must be corrected immediately by the Applicator to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Sika Sarnafil prior to demobilization. B. All Warranties referenced in this Specification shall have been submitted and have been accepted at time of contract award.
END OF SECTION
07 54 19 - 24
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT 07 56 00 FLUID APPLIED ROOFING PART 1 1.01 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The following specification outlines the requirements for cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane roofing and waterproofing membrane with approved color coating and all other ancillary waterproofing work including but not limited to installation of drains, pipe flashings, penetration flashings, sealants and metal work as specified. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing system including, membrane, penetration flashings, base flashings, and expansion joints. B. Substrate preparation, cleaning, leveling and patching C. Temporary waterproofing and priming D. Waterproofing membrane installation E. Flashing installation and expansion joint installation F. Colored Coating 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls B. 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane. B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. ACI-308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete D. ASTM - D638 - Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Plastics E. ASTM - D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coatings F. ASTM - D4259 - Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete G. ASTM - D4541 - Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings using Portable Adhesion Tester H. ASTM - E96(A) - Test Methods of Moisture Transmission of Material I. ASTM E-108, ANSI/UL 790 for fire resistance. 07 56 00 - 1
Fluid Applied Roofing
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT J. International Concrete Repair Institute 310.2-1997 Guideline Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers and Coatings. K. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Membrane System Product Data: Provide current standard printed product literature indicating characteristics of membrane materials, flashing materials, components, and accessories product specification and installation. B. Product Samples: Submit product samples of membrane and flashing materials showing color, texture, thickness and surfacing representative of the proposed system for review and approval by the COTR. C. Submit sample copies of both the Manufacturer and Applicator warranties for the periods stipulated. Each specimen must be a preprinted representative sample of the issuing companys standard warranty for the system specified. D. Submit copies of current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components of the work. E. Membrane Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane showing all a project plan, size, flashing details, and attachment for review and approval by the COTR and Membrane Manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Membrane Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with ten (10) years documented experience. Membrane Manufacturer shall submit the following certifications for review: 1. Substrates and conditions are acceptable for purpose of providing specified warranty. 2. Materials supplied shall meet the specified requirements. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with (3) years documented experience and approved by system manufacturer for warranted membrane installation. Applicator shall submit the following certification for review: 1. Applicator shall submit documentation from the membrane manufacturer to verify contractors status as an approved applicator for warranted installations. C. Evaluate moisture content of substrate materials. Constructor shall determine substrate moisture content throughout the work and record with Daily Inspection Reports or other form of reporting acceptable to the Owner or designated Representative, and Membrane Manufacturer. D. Random tests to determine tensile bond strength of membrane to substrate shall be conducted by the Contractor at the job site using an Elcometer Adhesion Tester Model 106 or similar device, or by the performance of a manual pull test. Contractor shall perform tests at the beginning of the Work, and at intervals as required to assure specified adhesion with a minimum of three (3) tests per 5000 square feet. Smaller Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT areas shall receive a minimum of three (3) tests. Test results shall be submitted to the COTR and the Membrane Manufacturer. Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR and Membrane Manufacturer in the event bond test results are below specified values. 1. Adequate surface preparation will be indicated by tensile bond strength of membrane to substrate greater than or equal to 220 psi (1.5 N/mm2) for pedestrian traffic and 300 psi (2.0 n/mm2) for vehicular (low speed) traffic and water flow/containment. 2. Adequate surface preparation will be indicated by 135 peel bond strength of membrane to substrate such that cohesive failure of substrate occurs before adhesive failure of membrane/substrate interface. 3. In the event the bond strengths are lower than the minimum specified, additional substrate preparation is required. Repeat testing to verify suitability of substrate preparation. E. Monitor quantities of installed materials. Monitor application of resin mixture, reinforcing fleece and flashing. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building and jurisdictional codes for roofing/waterproofing assembly and fire resistance requirements. B. Comply with requirements of OSHA, NIOSH or local governing authority for work place safety. C. Comply with authority or agency Confined Space Policy during and throughout all work to be performed. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene a pre-installation meeting at the job site at least one (1) week before starting work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including but not limited to, Engineer, COTR, Waterproofing Contractor, and Membrane Manufacturer's Representative. Review roofing/waterproofing preparation and installation procedures, coordination and scheduling required with related work, and condition and structural loading limitations of deck/substrate. 1.09 FIELD INSPECTION SERVICES A. Manufacturers technical representative shall provide the following inspections of the membrane application: 1. Job start inspection at the beginning of each phase of the project, to review special detailing conditions and substrate preparation. 2. Periodic in-progress inspections throughout duration of the project to evaluate membrane and flashing application. 3. Final punch-list inspection at the completion of each phase of the project prior to installation of any surfacing or overburden materials. 4. Warranty inspection to confirm completion of all punch list items, surfacing, and Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT overburden application. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor together with the COTR shall define a storage area for all components. The area shall be cool, dry, out of direct sunlight, and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and relevant regulatory agencies. Materials shall not be stored in quantities that will exceed design loads, damage substrate materials, hinder installation or drainage. B. Store solvent-bearing solutions, resins, additives, inhibitors or adhesives in accordance with the MSDS and/or local fire authority. After partial use of materials replace lids promptly and tightly to prevent contamination. C. Roll goods shall be stored horizontally on platforms sufficiently elevated to prevent contact with water and other contaminants. DO NOT use rolls that are wet, dirty or have damaged ends. D. Roofing/waterproofing materials must be kept dry at all times. If stored outside, raise materials above ground or roof level on pallets and cover with a tarpaulin or other waterproof material. Plastic wrapping installed at the factory should not be used as outside storage covers. E. Follow manufacturer's directions for protection of materials prior to and during installation. Do not use materials that have been damaged to the point that they will not perform as specified. Fleece reinforcing materials must be clean, dry and free of all contaminants. F. Copies of all current MSDS for all components shall be kept on site. Provide any and all crew members with appropriate safety data information and training as it relates to the specific chemical compound he or she may be expected to deal with. Each crew member shall be fully aware of first-aid measures to be undertaken in case of incidents. Comply with requirements of OSHA, NIOSH or local governing authority for work place safety. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing/waterproofing membrane during or with the threat of inclement weather. B. Application of cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane roofing/waterproofing membrane may proceed while air temperature is between 40F (5C) and 85F (30C) providing the substrate is a minimum of 5F above the dew point. C. When ambient temperatures are at or expected to fall below 50F (10C), or reach 85F (30C) or higher, follow Membrane System Manufacturer's recommendations for weather related additives and application procedures. D. Ensure that substrate materials are dry and free of contaminants. DO NOT commence with the application unless substrate conditions are suitable. Contractor shall demonstrate that substrate conditions are suitable for the application of the materials. E. Odor control and elimination measures are not typically necessary, but where required Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT by the COTR, Contractor shall implement odor control and elimination measures prior to and during the application of the roofing/waterproofing materials. Control/elimination measures shall be field tested at off-hours and typically consists of one (1) or a multiple of the following measures: 1. Sealing of air intakes with activated carbon filters. Install filters in accordance with requirements and recommendations of the filter manufacturer. Seal filters at joints and against building exterior walls to prevent leakage of unfiltered air where required due to size of intake opening. Provide track system to secure filters. 2. Erection and use of moveable enclosure(s) sized to accommodate work area(s) and stationary enclosure for resin mixing station. Enclosure shall be field constructed or pre-manufactured of fire retardant materials in compliance with local code requirements in accordance with requirements of the COTR. Equipment enclosure(s) with mechanical air intake/exhaust openings and Odor Control Air Cleaners, as required to clean enclosed air volume and to prevent odor migration outside the enclosure. Exhaust opening shall be sealed with activated carbon filter. 3. Placement of odor elimination stations inside and outside of the enclosure(s) as required by field condition, in coordination with the COTR. 4. Protection of Contractor personnel and occupants of the structure and surrounding buildings as necessary to comply with requirements of OSHA, NIOSH and/or governing local authority. F. When disposing of all refuse or unused materials, observe all EPA, OSHA or local disposal requirements. 1.12 COORDINATION & PROTECTION A. Coordinate the work with the installation of associated metal flashings, accessories, appurtenances, etc. as the work of this section proceeds. B. Building components shall be protected adequately (with tarp or other suitable material) from soil, stains, or spills at all hoisting points and areas of application. Contractor shall be responsible for preventing damage from any operation under its Contract. Any such damage shall be repaired at Contractor's expense to COTR's satisfaction or be restored to original condition. C. Provide barricades, retaining ropes, safety elements (active/passive) and any appropriate signage required by OSHA, NIOSH, and NSC and/or the COTR. D. Protect finished roofing/waterproofing membrane from damage by other trades. Do not allow waste products containing petroleum, grease, acid, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal oil, animal fat, etc. or direct steam venting to come into direct contact with the membrane. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Provide Twenty (20) year manufacturer's standard warranty under provisions of this section. This warranty provides for cost of labor and materials for loss of watertightness, limited to amounts necessary to effect repairs Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT necessitated by either defective material or defects in related installation workmanship, with total expenditure limited to the original cost to the FAA of materials. B. Waterproofing Contractor's Warranty: Provide Two (2) year "Applicator Maintenance Warranty" covering workmanship for all work of this section including installation of membrane, flashings, metal work, and roofing/waterproofing accessories. C. Submit (2) executed copies of both the manufacturer and applicator warranties for the periods stipulated, starting from the date of substantial completion. Each warranty must be signed by an authorized representative of the issuing company. 1.14 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. Materials proposed for use in the performance of the work that are not specified herein must be submitted to the FAA for evaluation no later than ten days prior to bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The products herein specified are totally pre-engineered products of the listed manufacturer and establish criteria for the approval of substitutions. Products must be part of a pre-engineered system, equivalent in function, quality, composition and method of application to be considered for approval as an "Approved Substitute". Substitute materials must meet or exceed the physical performance characteristics of the specified materials. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS MEMBRANE A. Membrane: Two-component, cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane with a 360 degree needle punched non-woven 165 polyester reinforcing fleece, for a finished dry film membrane thickness of .070 inch nominal per ply. Provide products manufactured and supplied by the following: 1. Kemper Systems 2K-PUR resin for use in an adhered waterproofing system. 2. Approved Equal B. Physical Properties: Property Color Physical state Nominal thickness (165 fleece) Tensile strength @ break Elongation Tearing strength Puncture resistance Dimensional stability Water absorption Surface hardness Water vapor transmission Fluid Applied Roofing Typical Value Gray-Green Cures to solid 70 mils 120 lb/in 50% 5.0 lbs 140 lbf 0.1% 2.2% Shore A 85 0.04 perms Test Method ASTM D-751 ASTM D-751 ASTM D-751 FTMS 101-2031 ASTM D-1204 ASTM D-471 ASTM D-2240 ASTM E-96 07 56 00 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT Usage time* 30 minutes Rainproof after* 6 hours Solid to walk on after* 24 hours Solid to drive on with air rubber tires 48 hours after* Overburden may be applied after 2 days Completely hardened after 3 days Crack spanning 2mm/0.08 inch Resistance to temperatures up to (short 250C/482F term) *all times are approximate and depend upon air flow, humidity and temperature. 2.03 FLASHINGS A. Membrane Flashings: A composite of the same resin material as field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. ACCESSORIES Polyurethane Primer: Two-component, solvent-free, high solids polyurethane resin for use in improving adhesion of membrane to wood, metal and bituminous substrate surfaces. Monitor application rate and adjust depending on substrate absorbency. Epoxy Primer: Two-component, solvent-free epoxy coating for use in improving adhesion of membrane to cementitious/masonry substrate surfaces. Monitor application rate and adjust depending on substrate absorbency. Tools, Accessories, and Cleaners: Supplied and/or approved by membrane manufacturer for product installation. Backer Rod: Expanded, closed-cell polyethylene foam designed for use with coldapplied joint sealant. Caulking: Single component, non-sag elastomeric polyurethane sealant, as recommended or supplied by membrane manufacturer for use in making airtight and watertight seals where required. Wood Nailers and Cant Strips: New wood nailers and cant strips shall be pressure treated for rot resistance (e.g., "Wolmanized" or "Osmose K-33"), #2 or better lumber. Asphaltic or creosote treated lumber is not acceptable. Miscellaneous Fasteners: FM-approved and appropriate for purpose intended, length required for thickness of material, with metal plates, and approved by membrane system manufacturer. Drains: Spun/cast aluminum or cast iron roof drain with strainer/grate, as supplied or approved by membrane manufacturer. Temporary and Night Sealant: As recommended or required by membrane manufacturer.
2.04 A.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
G.
H. I. 2.05
SURFACINGS AND COATINGS A. Color Coating: Two-component polyurethane-based coating suitable for use as a colored coating for exposed and submerged applications, as provided by the following Manufacturer: 1. Kemper System, Inc.s Kemperdur Deko Finish Colored (formerly Kemcoat Color.) 07 56 00 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck/substrate openings, curbs, and protrusions through deck/substrate, wood cant strips and reglets are in place and solidly set. C. Verify deck/substrate is structurally supported, secure and sound. PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. General: Surfaces to be prepared as a substrate for the new waterproofing system as follows: 1. The contractor shall determine the condition of the existing structural deck/substrate. All defects in the deck or substrate shall be corrected before new waterproofing work commences. Areas of deteriorated deck/substrate, porous or other affected materials must be removed and replaced with new to match existing. 2. Prepare flashing substrates as required for application of new waterproofing membrane flashings. 3. Inspect substrates, and correct defects before application of new waterproofing. Fill all surface voids greater than 1/8 inch wide with an acceptable fill material. 4. Remove all ponded water, snow, frost and/or ice from the work substrate prior to installing new waterproofing materials. 5. The final substrate for waterproofing shall be clean, dry, free of loose, spalled or weak material including coatings, mineral aggregate, and flood coat/gravel surfacing, oil, grease, contaminants, abrupt changes in level, waterproofing agents, curing compounds, and free of projections which could damage membrane materials. B. Steel/Metal: 1. Clean and prepare metal surfaces to near white metal in accordance with SSPC SP3 (power tool clean) or as required by membrane manufacturer. Extend preparation a minimum of three (3) inches beyond the termination of the membrane flashing materials. Notch steel surfaces to provide a rust-stop. 2. In addition to cleaning, all metal surfaces shall be abraded to provide a rough open surface. A wire brush finish is not acceptable. C. Wood/Plywood: 1. Plywood shall be identified with American Plywood Association (APA) grade trade marks and shall meet the requirements of product standard PS1. Strip plywood joints with four inch (4") wide strip of flashing membrane. Cover knot holes or cracks with strips of flashing Membrane. D. Other Flashing Surfaces: 1. Remove all contaminants as required by membrane manufacturer. Surface preparation shall be performed by means approved by Owner or his designated Representative. 3.03 PRIMER APPLICATION A. General: 1. Mix and apply two-component primer in strict accordance with written instructions of Membrane Manufacturer. Use only proprietary materials, as supplied by the membrane manufacturer. 2. The substrate surface must be dry, with any remaining dust or loose particles 07 56 00 - 8
3.02
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT removed using clean, dry, oil-free compressed air, industrial vacuum, cloth wipe or a combination of methods. 3. Do not install primer on any substrate containing newly applied and/or active asphalt, coal-tar pitch, creosote or penta-based materials unless approved in writing by Membrane Manufacturer. Some substrates may require additional preparation before applying primer. B. Mixing of Standard EP and D Primers: 1. Premix primer Component A thoroughly with a spiral agitator or stir stick. Pour primer Component B into Component A and mix the components for approximately 2 minutes with a clean spiral agitator on slow speed or stir stick without creating any bubbles or streaks. DO NOT AERATE. The Primer solution should be a uniform color, with no light or dark streaks present. 2. Do not thin primer. Determine required primer coverage for each substrate material/condition and apply in strict accordance with written instructions of Membrane Manufacturer. 3. Mix only that amount of primer components A & B that can be used in 30 minutes. C. Application of Primer: 1. Apply primer at the rate of approximately 0.7 1.4 gallons (2.65-5.30L) per 100 square feet (9 m2). 2. Roll or brush the primer evenly onto the surface to fully saturate the substrate in one application. Do not allow primer to pond or collect in low areas. 3. Apply primer only up to the edge of the membrane flashing terminations. Primer application past the membrane terminations requires surfacing with an approved material. 4. For EP primer applications over cementitious substrates where protection from substrate wetness is required, apply primer coat at a heavier application rate until pore saturation is achieved. 5. For all EP primer applications, apply kiln-dried sand into the final coat of EP primer while still wet at the rate of 30 lbs. per 100 square feet. 6. Allow standard primers to cure for a minimum of twelve (12) hours before membrane application. Membrane must be applied to primer only when completely dry and without tack. 7. Exposure of the primer in excess of eight (8) days or premature exposure to moisture may require removal and application of new primer. DO NOT apply new primer over exposed primer older than eight (8) days, primer prematurely exposed to moisture, or primer used as temporary waterproofing, unless approved in writing by the Membrane Manufacturer. D. Disposal of Primer: 1. Cured primer may be disposed of in standard landfills. This is accomplished by thoroughly mixing all components. 2. Uncured primer is considered a hazardous material and must be handled as such, in accordance with local, state and federal regulation. Do not through uncured resin away. 3.04 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. General: 1. Mix and apply cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane in strict accordance with written instructions of Membrane Manufacturer. Use only proprietary membrane resins and materials, as supplied by the membrane manufacturer. 2. The primed substrate surface shall be dry, with any remaining dust or loose 07 56 00 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT particles removed using clean, dry, oil-free compressed air, industrial vacuum, cloth-wipe or a combination. 3. Protect all areas where membrane has been installed. Do not work off installed membrane during application of remaining work before forty-eight (48) hours of curing. Movement of materials and equipment across installed membrane is not acceptable. If movement is necessary, provide complete protection of affected areas. 4. Closely follow the Membrane Manufacturer's recommendation for hot and cold weather application. Monitor surface and ambient temperatures, including the effects of wind chill. B. Mixing of Resin: 1. Mix resin Component A (cream formulation) with a spiral agitator until the liquid is a uniform cream color. If the ambient temperature is below 50F (10C), then a weather related additive should be combined and mixed into the Component A. a. Accelerator should be added to resin Component A when the ambient temperature is 50F (10C) and below. The accelerator should be mixed with the spiral agitator for 5 minutes or until both liquids are thoroughly blended. 2. Mix resin Component B (dark brown formulation) with a separate spiral agitator until the color is a uniform dark syrup color. 3. Pour resin Component A and Component B into a third clean bucket at a 4:1 ratio and thoroughly mix the components with a clean spiral agitator. The Resin solution should be a uniform color, with no light or dark streaks present. 4. Mix only that amount of resin components A & B that can be used in 30 minutes. C. Application of Resin/Fleece 1. Apply mixed resin to the prepared surface at the approximate rate of 4.5 gallons (16.9L) per 100 square feet (9 m2). The resin should be rolled or brushed liberally and evenly onto the surface using a broad, even stroke. Cover one working area at a time, between 15 20 ft.2 (1.4 1.9 m2). 2. Roll out dry polyester fleece onto the liquid resin mix, making sure the SMOOTH SIDE IS FACING UP (natural unrolling procedure), avoiding any folds and wrinkles. The fleece will begin to rapidly saturate with the liquid resin mix. Use a medium nap roller or brush to work the resin into the fleece, saturating from the bottom up, and eliminating air bubbles, wrinkles, etc. The appearance of the saturated fleece should be light opaque amber with no white spots. White spots are indications of unsaturated fleece or lack of adhesion. It is important to correct these faults before the resin cures. 3. Apply additional liquid resin mix on top of fleece at the approximate rate of 2 gallons (7.5L) per 100 square feet (9 m2) to finish the saturation of the fleece. Roll this final coating into the fleece, which will result in a glossy appearance. The fleece can only hold so much resin and all excess should be rolled forward to the unsaturated fleece, eliminating ponding or excessive build-up of the resin. Any excess resin left on the top of the fleece will weather and peel off. The correct amount of resin will leave no whiteness in fleece and there will be a slightly fibrous surface texture. The final resin coating should be smooth and uniform. 4. Prevent contact between mixed/unmixed resin and new/existing membrane. If any unmixed resin contacts membrane surface remove immediately and clean thoroughly with a cloth rag. 5. At all fleece seams, allow a 2 (5 cm) overlap for all side joints and a 4 (10 cm) overlap for all end joints. 6. At membrane tie-offs, clean in-place membrane with MEK (methyl ethyl ketone) solvent once resin has cured. Allow solvents to fully evaporate before application of new resin. Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 10
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT D. Disposal of Resin: 1. Cured resin may be disposed of in standard landfills. This is accomplished by thoroughly mixing all components. 2. Uncured resin is considered a hazardous material and must be handled as such, in accordance with local, state and federal regulation. Do not throw uncured resin away. 3.05 A. FLASHING APPLICATION General: 1. Install flashing system in accordance with the requirements/recommendations of the Membrane manufacturer and as depicted on standard drawings and details. Provide system with base flashing, edge flashing, penetration flashing, counter flashing, and all other flashings required for a complete watertight system. 2. Wherever possible, install the flashings before installing the field membrane to minimize foot traffic over newly installed field membrane. 3. All membrane flashings shall be installed concurrently with the waterproofing membrane as the job progresses. Temporary flashings are not allowed without prior written approval from the Membrane manufacturer. Should any water penetrate the new waterproofing membrane because of incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense. 4. Provide a minimum vertical height of 8" for all flashing terminations. Flashing height shall be at least as high as the potential water level that could be reached as a result of a deluging rain and/or poor slope. Do not flash over existing throughwall flashings, weep holes and overflow scuppers. 5. All flashings shall be terminated as required by the Membrane Manufacturer. Membrane Flashing General. 1. Membrane flashings shall be fabricated with primer appropriate for the substrate surface, resin of the same base chemical type as the field membrane, and fleece of the same weight as the field membrane unless specified otherwise. 2. Primer, resin, and fleece mixing and application methods as specified for field membranes are also suitable for membrane flashing. 3. Fleece shall overlap 2 (5 cm) minimum for all joints. Fleece shall be cut neatly to fit all flashing conditions without a buildup of multiple fleece layers. Work wet membrane with a brush or roller to eliminate blisters, openings, or lifting at corners, junctions, and transitions. Pipes, Conduits, and Unusually Shaped Penetrations: 1. Flash all penetrations using cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane. Flashing material shall be the same resin used in the field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. 2. Flashing is typically constructed as a two part assembly consisting of a vertical wrap and a horizontal target patch. There must be a minimum of a two (2) inch (5 cm) overlap between vertical and horizontal flashing components. Drains and Scuppers: 1. Acceptable drain and scupper materials are cast iron, cast aluminum, and copper. 2. Connect new drains and scuppers to existing storm sewer system. 3. Alternatively, replace all broken or damaged parts of existing drains and scuppers, or provide and install an acceptable insert. 4. Flash drains and scuppers using cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane. Flashing material shall be the same resin used in the field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. 5. Flashing material shall extend four (4) inches minimum onto drain, scupper, or insert flange. 6. Install clamping ring if provided as part of the drain or scupper design. Install a 07 56 00 - 11
B.
C.
D.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT strainer basket to prevent debris from clogging the drainage line. E. Hot Stacks: 1. Protect the membrane components from direct contact with steam or heat sources when the in-service temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. In all such cases flash to an intermediate "cool" sleeve. 2. Fabricate "cool" sleeve in the form of a metal cone using galvanized metal in accordance with Membrane manufacturers details. 3. Flash all penetrations using cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane. Flashing material shall be the same resin used in the field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. 4. Flashing is typically constructed as a two part assembly consisting of a vertical wrap and a horizontal target patch. There must be a minimum of a two (2) inch (5 cm) overlap between vertical and horizontal flashing components. F. Flexible Penetrations: 1. Provide a weathertight gooseneck of round cross-section for each penetration or group of penetrations. Set in water cut-off mastic and secure to the structural substrate. 2. Acceptable gooseneck material is copper, of a sheet weight appropriate for the application. 3. Flash all penetrations using cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane. Flashing material shall be the same resin used in the field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. 4. Flashing is typically constructed as a two part assembly consisting of a vertical wrap and a horizontal target patch. There must be a minimum of a two (2) inch (5 cm) overlap between vertical and horizontal flashing components. G. Walls, Curbs and Base Flashings: 1. Wall, curb and base flashings shall be installed to solid substrate surfaces only. Adhering to gypsum-based panels, cementitious stucco, synthetic stucco, wood or metal siding, and other similar materials is not acceptable. 2. Flash all walls, curbs and base flashings using cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane. Flashing material shall be the same resin used in the field membrane with 165 fleece reinforcement. 3. As required by project specifications, reinforce all transition locations and other potential wear areas with a four (4) inch wide 165 polyester fleece bottom layer evenly positioned over the transition prior to installing the exposed flashing layer. 4. Reinforce all inside and outside corners with a four (4) inch diameter conical piece of 165 fleece prior to installing the exposed flashing layer. 5. All pins, dowels and other fixation elements shall be flashed separately with a vertical flashing component prior to installing the exposed flashing layer. 6. Extend flashing a minimum of four (4) inches onto the field substrate surface. H. Drip Edges and Gravel Stops: 1. Metal drip edges and gravel stops shall be installed to solid substrate surfaces only. Securement to gypsum-based panels, cementitious stucco, synthetic stucco, wood or metal siding or coping, and other similar materials is not acceptable. 2. Flash all drip edges and gravel stops by extending the field membrane all the way to the edge of the exposed face prior to installing the metal edging. Strip in the metal flange with a separate 8 inch wide strip of membrane adhered to both the securement flange and to the field membrane. 3. For conditions where water infiltration behind the exposed drip edge or gravel stop face is possible, install a separate 165 polyester fleece bottom layer positioned behind the face area and extending a minimum of four (4) inches past the securement flange onto the field substrate prior to installing the drip edge or Fluid Applied Roofing 07 56 00 - 12
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT gravel stop. I. Field Fabricated Control or Expansion Joint Flashing: 1. Control or expansion joints in excess of two (2) inches in width require the use of a separate engineered joint system. 2. Control or expansion joints two (2) inches or less in width may be flashed with two layers of cold fluid-applied reinforced polyurethane waterproofing membrane and a compressible foam or rubber insert. Use a 165 polyester reinforcing fleece bottom layer and 165 polyester fleece top layer. 3. Grind or otherwise bevel the inside edges of the joint opening to provide a smooth transition edge for the fleece. 4. Flashing typically consists of a 165 polyester reinforcing fleece bottom layer looped into the joint as a cradle, a compressible foam or rubber insert at 25% compression fitted into the joint, and a 165 polyester fleece top layer applied over the joint. Extend both fleece layers four (4) inches minimum onto the field substrate on both sides of the joint. 5. Apply the field membrane over the entire joint area. J. Electrical Conduit, Gas Lines and Lightning Protection 1. Supports for electrical conduit and gas lines greater than one (1) inch in diameter require the use of a separate engineered support system. 2. Supports for electrical conduit and gas lines one (1) inch or less in diameter, and bases for lightning protection rods and cable, can be adhered directly to the membrane surface with a single-component, high quality polyurethane sealant. 3.06 SURFACING AND FINISHES A. Coating-Type Finish Surfacing: 1. Where specified, provide and install Membrane Manufacturers approved urethane-based coating applied over clean, fully cured membrane. 2. For two-component coatings, premix resin component A thoroughly with a spiral agitator or stir stick. Pour Color Component B into Component A and mix the components for approximately 2 minutes with a clean spiral agitator on slow speed or stir stick without creating any bubbles or streaks until material is consistent in color. Transfer to a clean container and mix again to ensure a thorough combination of the two components. 3. Apply coating at a rate of approximately 0.8 gallons per 100 square feet. Avoid any traffic for a minimum of two (2) days to allow for surfacing to cure. TEMPORARY CLOSURES & WATERSTOPS A. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new waterproofing system. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition. All temporary closures shall be made as recommended or required by the membrane manufacturer. PROTECTION A. Upon completion of waterproofing and flashings (including all associated work), institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. Protect all areas where membrane has been installed. CLOSEOUT A. Correction of Work: 07 56 00 - 13
3.07
3.08
3.09
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT Work that does not conform to specified requirements including tolerances, slopes, and finishes shall be corrected and/or replaced. Any deficiencies of membrane application, termination and/or protection as noted during the Membrane manufacturers inspections shall be corrected and/or replaced at Contractors expense. B. Clean-Up: 1. Site clean-up, including both interior and exterior building areas that have been affected by construction, shall be restored to preconstruction condition. 1.
END OF SECTION
07 56 00 - 14
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT SECTION 08 91 19 METAL WALL LOUVERS PART 2 1.01 SUMMARY GENERAL
A. Furnish and install louvers, bird screens, blank-off panels, structural supports and attachment brackets as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. The louvers to be furnished include fixed extruded storm resistant louvers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 1. AMCA Standard 500-L-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating 2. AMCA Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers B. The Aluminum Association Incorporated 1. Aluminum Standards and Data 2. Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures C. American Society of Civil Engineers 1. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures D. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM B209 2. ASTM B211 3. ASTM B221 4. ASTM E90-90 E. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA 800 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants 2. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA TIR Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners 4. AAMA 2605-98 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels F. Canadian Standards Association 1. CAN3-S157-M83 Strength Design in Aluminum 2. S136 94 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08 91 19 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data sheets for each type of louver to be used. Cut sheets shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Air flow and water entrainment performance test results. 2. Material types and thickness. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sections and specific details for each louver. Show anchorage details and connections for all component parts. C. Submit color chips for color selection by the COTR. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had not less than six years experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to that shown and required. B. Performance Requirements: Provide AMCA and BSRIA test data as required to confirm that the louvers have the specified air and water performance characteristics. C. Acoustical Performance: Where applicable, submit test reports to confirm that the louvers meet the specified STC and Noise Reduction requirements. D. Structural Requirements: Design all materials to withstand wind and snow loads as required by the applicable building code. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver structural members to be l/180 or 0.75 inch, whichever is less. Maximum allowable deflection for the louver blades to be l/120 or 0.50 inch across the weak axis, whichever is less. E. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all products will be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: At the time of delivery all materials shall be visually inspected for damage. Any damaged boxes, crates, louver sections, etc. shall be noted on the receiving ticket and immediately reported to the shipping company and the material manufacturer. B. Storage: 1. Material may be stored flat, on end or on its side. 2. Material may be stored either indoors or outdoors. 3. If stored outdoors the material must be raised sufficiently off the ground to prevent it being flooded. 4. If stored out doors the material must be covered with a weather proof flame resistant
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08 91 19 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT sheeting or tarpaulin. C. Handling: 1. Material shall be handled in accordance with sound material handling practices and in such a way as to minimize racking. 2. Louver sections may be hoisted by attaching straps to the jambs and lifting the section while it is in a vertical position. 3. Louver sections should only be lifted and carried by the jambs. Heads, sills and blades are not to be used for lifting or hoisting louver sections.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. The louvers and related materials herein specified and indicated on the drawings shall be as manufactured by: Construction Specialties, Inc, 895 Lakefront Promenade, Cranford, NJ 07016 or approved equal. B. Products equal to the C/S materials may be offered providing that the manufacturer and materials are pre-approved at least 10 working days before the bid date. 2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B3209, Alloy 1100, 3003 or 5005. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide C/S louver models, bird screens, blank-off panels, structural supports and accessories as specified and/or shown on the drawings. Materials, sizes, depths, arrangements and material thickness to be as indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. B. Louvers to be mechanically assembled using stainless steel or aluminum fasteners. C. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly.
2.04
LOUVER MODELS
A. C/S 4 Deep Storm Resistant Fixed Horizontal Louver Model RS-4300 1. Material: Heads, sills, jambs and mullions to be one-piece structural aluminum members with integral caulking slot and retaining beads. Mullions shall be sliding interlock with integral drains. Blades to be one-piece aluminum extrusions with front lip
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08 91 19 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOFING AND HVAC REPLACEMENT gutter and multiple secondary gutters designed to catch and direct water to jamb and mullion downspouts. Louvers to be supplied with 4 (101.6mm) high by full depth sill flashings formed from minimum 0.050 (1.27mm) thick aluminum. Sill flashings to have welded side panels. Louvers and sill flashings to be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures to ensure complete water integrity performance of the louver system. 2. AMCA Performance: A 4 x 4 unit shall conform to the following: Free Area 6.77 sq. ft. (0.63 sq. m.) Intake Pressure drop at 900 fpm free area velocity (274 m/min) 0.51 in. H2O (12.95 mm) 3. Wind Driven Rain Performance: The louver test was based on a 39.370"(1.00m) x 39.370" (1.00 m) core area. Unit tested at a rainfall rate of 3.0 inches per hour (75 mm/hr) and with a wind directed to the face of the louver at a velocity 29.1-mph (13 m/s). The test data shall show the water penetration effectiveness rating at each corresponding ventilation rate.
Core Ventilation Rate (m/s): Core Ventilation Rate (ft/min):
Free Area Ventilation Rate (ft/min):
0.0 0 0
0.5 106 262
1.0 196 485
1.5 291 720
2.0 391 968
2.5 493
3.0 582
3.5 667
Rating effectiveness: Effectiveness Rating:
A A A = 1 to 0.99
A B B = 0.989 to 0.95
122 0 C D C = 0.949 to 0.80
144 165 0 1 D D D = 0.80 to 0
2.05
FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process. Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect. B. Two Coat Fluorocarbon Coating 1. Louvers to be finished with a minimum 1.0 mil (0.025mm) thick full strength 70% resin, 2 coat Fluoropolymer system. 2. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched and given a chromated conversion pretreatment before application of the MICA II coating. The coating shall consist of a primer and a pigmented PFV2 topcoat. It shall receive a bake cycle of 17 minutes at 450F. All finishing procedures shall be one continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturer. 3. Manufacturer to furnish an extended 20 limited warranty for the Kynar/Hylar coating. This limited warranty shall begin on the date of material shipment.
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08 91 19 - 4
2.06 BIRD SCREENS: Unless otherwise indicated, all louvers to be furnished with mill finish bird or insect screens. A. Screens to be 5/8 (15.9mm) mesh, 0.050 (1.27mm) thick expanded and flattened aluminum bird screen secured within 0.055 (1.40mm) thick extruded aluminum frames. Frames to have mitered corners and corner locks. 2.07 BLANK OFFS
A. Blank-off panels to be 1 (25.4mm) thick and to be faced on both sides with 0.032 (0.81 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Panels to be fabricated with an expanded polystyrene (EPS)
0 2
core having an R-value of 4 ( F*ft *h/Btu). Panel perimeter frame to be 0.050 (1.27mm) thick-formed aluminum channels. Panel frame to be mitered at the corners. Panels to be finished to match louvers.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION: Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. C. Anchor louvers to the building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings. D. Erection Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on the approved shop drawings: 1/8" per 12 feet of length, but not exceeding 1/2" in any total building length or portion thereof (noncumulative). 2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end to end, edgeto edge in line or separated by less than 3": 1/16" (shop or field joints). This limiting condition shall prevail under both load and no load conditions. E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assembly. F. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed. METAL WALL LOUVERS 08 91 19 - 5
G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. 3.03 PROTECTION: Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Immediately clean exposed surfaces of the louvers to remove fingerprints and dirt accumulation during the installation process. Do not let soiling remain until the final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to the material finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Architect, remove damaged materials and replace with new materials. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with a compatible air-dried coating that matches the color and gloss of the factory applied coating.
END OF SECTION
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08 91 19 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 09 29 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for ceilings, shaft wall ceilings, and partition walls constructed of gypsum wallboard and metal stud framing. This section is applicable to patching of existing gypsum wallboard partitions that have been damaged by water. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest issue of the publications shall be used. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: A 653/A 653M C11 C36 C442 C475 C630 C645 C665 C754 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process Terms Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials. Gypsum Wallboard Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board. Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C840 C919 C1002 C1047 E 84 E90 E119
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication: Fire Resistance Directory C. Gypsum Association (GA) Publications: GA-214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 29 00 -1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT GA 216 GA-600 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Fire Resistance Design Manual
D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 requirements.
A. Catalog Data: Submit catalog information for each type of metal framing, gypsum board, fastener, joint treatment material, adhesive, and metal trim. Clearly mark data which describe more than one type or item to indicate which type or item will be provided. B. Certificates of Compliance: Submit certificates attesting that the following materials meet the requirements specified: 1. Each type of gypsum board. 2. Fasteners. 3. Adhesive. 4. Metal or plastic trim. 5. Control joints. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Performance Requirements, General: Provide gypsum board partitions and shaft wall systems complying with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by pretesting manufacturer's corresponding stock systems. B. Structural Performance Characteristics: Provide gypsum board shaft wall systems engineered to withstand the following lateral design loadings (air pressures), applied transiently and cyclically, for maximum heights of partitions required, within the following deflection limits, verified by pretesting for deflection characteristics: 1. Lateral Loading: 10 psf. 2. Deflection Limit: 1/120 of partition height. 3. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide gypsum board shaft wall systems designed and pretested to achieve the following minimum ratings for sound transmission class (STC) per ASTM E90. STC Rating: 39 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of manufacturer, or supplier. B. Handling: Neatly stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.
09 29 00 -2
C. Storage: Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary to store gypsum board outside, store off the ground, properly supported on a level platform, and protected from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. Temperature: Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the application of gypsum board and joint treatment materials, or the bonding of adhesives. B. Exposure to Weather: Protect gypsum board products from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS: Shall conform to the respective specifications and standards and to the requirements specified herein. Provide gypsum board manufactured from asbestos-free materials. 2.02 STEEL FRAMING: ASTM C645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI. 2.03 2.04 2.05 475. GYPSUM WALLBOARD: ASTM C36, Type X, 5/8 thick, and with tapered edges. MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALLBOARD: ASTM C 630, 5/8 thick. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: Provide materials in accordance with ASTM C
A. All-Purpose Low Dust Compound: Provide low dust-producing, lightweight compound, specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners. Product shall be Sheetrock Plus 3 with Dust Control All Purpose Joint Compound, as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum, or approved equal. B. Joint Tape: Cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or special tape recommended by the manufacturer. 2.06 SCREWS: ASTM C 1002. Type "S" steel drill screws. Use specially designed steel screws as recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board for the screw application of gypsum board to gypsum board or to steel framing.
09 29 00 -3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2.07 RUNNER FASTENERS: Low-velocity, tool driven fasteners of type, size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall system without exceeding allowable design stress of runner, fastener or structural substrate in which anchor is embedded. 2.08 CORNERBEAD AND EDGE TRIM: Fabricate from corrosive protective coated steel designed for its intended use. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials that may adversely affect the bond of joint treatment. Provide corner beads edge trim-beads, and onepiece control joint beads all with bead and face flange to receive joint compound. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board shaft wall systems of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the system or in accordance with the approved UL design. A. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards of type indicated B. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable synthetic rubber sealant. C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type 1 (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION: Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall construction attaches or abuts including preset hollow metal frames and structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of shaft wall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 NONLOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING AND FURRING: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES: Framing members that will be covered by finish materials such as wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within the following limits: A. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position; B. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line; C. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
09 29 00 -4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT D. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane. 3.04 INSPECTION: Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board. Do not proceed with work until framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board. 3.05 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD: Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 and the requirements specified herein. Apply gypsum board with separate boards in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger end joints of adjoining boards. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints. Use gypsum board of maximum practical length. Cut out gypsum board as required making neat close joints around openings. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may be bonded together with an adhesive, except where prohibited by fire rating(s). Leave a space approximately 1/4-inch at bottom of gypsum board for caulking. A. Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring: Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII. 3.06 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD: Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and GA 216. Unless otherwise specified, all gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings shall be finished to Level 4 in accordance with GA 214, Gypsum Association Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. Treatment for water-resistant gypsum board shall be as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.07 UNIFORM SURFACE: Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semi gloss or gloss paint finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. 3.08 CAULKING: Caulk where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, at door and window frames, sills, and at openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through gypsum board. Apply caulking material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board. 3.09 PATCHING: Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance, ready to receive finish as specified.
***END OF SECTION***
09 29 00 -5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing new acoustical ceiling tiles and new grid in modified areas as required. This includes, but is not limited to, new ceiling grid and acoustical tile in the ATCT cab. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest issue of the publications shall be used. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: A 641 C 423 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels Latex Sealing Compounds Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Determination of Sound Transmission Class Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
C 635 C 636
C 834 D 217 E 84 E 413 E 1264
B. Ceiling and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) Publication: AMA-1-II-1967 1.03 Ceiling Sound Transmission Test by Two-Room Method
SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 requirements.
A. Samples: One of each type of acoustical unit. Show the texture, finish and color. One of each type of suspension system components. B. Manufacturer's Data: Standard catalog data for acoustical units and suspension systems.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 1
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver acoustical units in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Handle materials carefully and store them under cover in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: For 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units, maintain temperature and relative humidity at typical in-service conditions. Interior finish work shall be completed and dry before installation. Mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line shall be completed and approved prior to the start of acoustical ceiling installation. 1.06 EXTRA STOCK: Furnish one box of acoustical units for each type units installed.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
ATCT CAB,: Furnish and install the following products:
A. ACOUSTICAL TILE: ASTM E 1264, and the following requirements. 1. Color and Pattern: Provide USG Glacier SL, 2 x 2x flat black, foil-backed heavily textured cast tile, or approved equal. 2. Fire Resistance: Class A in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Acoustics: Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.65 and Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) of 35. B. SUSPENSION SYSTEM: ASTM C 635 and the following requirements: 1. Type: Exposed grid. Provide USG DX or DXL or approved equal. 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty for main runners and cross tees. 3. Finish: Surfaces exposed to view shall have a factory applied enamel finish Color shall be flat black. 4. Seismic: Provide manufacturers ACM7 clips, or approved equal, to meet Seismic Category C. 5. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard 7/8 wall moldings. 6. Hangers Wire: ASTM A641 Composition 1010, soft annealed, light zinc coated finish, 0.1055 inches in diameter 12 gauge.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 2
2.02
Other areas not otherwise noted: Furnish and install the following products:
A. ACOUSTICAL TILE: ASTM E 1264, and the following requirements. 1. Color and Pattern: Provide Armstrong Cirrus, #534, 24x 24 x 7/8, angled tegular edge, or approved equal. 2. Fire Resistance: Class A in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Acoustics: Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 and Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) of 35. B. SUSPENSION SYSTEM: ASTM C 635 and the following requirements: 1. Type: Exposed grid. Provide Armstrong Prelude, 15/16, or approved equal. 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty for main runners and cross tees. 3. Finish: Surfaces exposed to view shall have a factory applied enamel finish to match existing grid system. 4. Seismic: Provide manufacturers Seismic Rx clips, or approved equal, to meet Seismic Category C. 5. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard wall or edge moldings. 6. Hangers Wire: ASTM A641 Composition 1010, soft annealed, light zinc coated finish, 0.1055 inches in diameter 12 gauge. 2.03 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT: Synthetic rubber or polymeric-based material complying with ASTM C 834.
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with ASTM C 636.
A. Hangers: Space hangers 4 feet on center each direction. Lay hangers out for each individual room or space. Install additional hangers where required to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles and other penetrations through the ceiling. B. Suspension Members: Keep main runners and carrying channels clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners for each ceiling span.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Acoustical Units: Edges of ceiling tiles shall be in close contact with metal supports and in true alignment. Arrange units so that units less than 1/2 widths are minimized. Center all electrical fixtures in center of ceiling tiles. D. Wall or Edge Molding: Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. E. Caulking: Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web of wall or edge moldings. 3.02 CLEANING: Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces. Remove damaged or improperly installed units and install new materials.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Use products specified in this section to finish all surfaces exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated, including but not limited to the following: 1. B. C. D. 1.2 Exterior metal catwalk grating. Materials and products having factory-applied primer are not considered factory finished. For paint systems, see Schedule at end of this section. For colors, see Finish Schedule on Drawings, except for colors for mechanical and electrical color coding.
REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 16 Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 2. ASTM D 3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. B. Master Painters Institute (MPI) 1. MPI # 163 Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, SemiGloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. 2. 3. SSPC-SP1 SSPC-SP2 SSPC-SP7 Solvent Cleaning Hand Tool Cleaning Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Conform to definitions of terms in ASTM D 16 in interpreting requirements of this specification section.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. 2. 3. C. Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finishes. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, which represents actual product, color, and finish.
D.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of coatings of quality specified with minimum of ten (10) years experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three (3) years documented experience and approved by the coating manufacturer.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Establish and maintain storage area conditions for products of this section in accordance with manufacturer's instructions until installation. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weather tight location. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer before, during, and after application of coatings. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. During application of coating materials, post "WET PAINT" signs. During application of solvent-based materials, post "NO SMOKING" signs.
B. C. 1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of finish materials to avoid damage to installed materials.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Do not apply coating materials until moisture-producing construction activities, dust-producing construction activities, and other construction activities which could impair performance or appearance of the coatings, have been completed.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply for each finish coating material, color, and finish specified two gallons (7.75L) of coating material, in sealed 1 gallon (3.875 L) containers, marked with color and finish identification. Custom Colors: Provide details of color formula and product availability for each finish specified.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Duron, 10406 Tucker Street, Beltsville, MD 20705. ASD. Tel: (800) 723-8766, ext. 3175, or (301) 937-4700, ext. 3175. Fax: (301) 9023979. E-mail: paintinfo@duron.com. www.duron.com. 2. The Sherwin-Williams Company, 101 Prospect Avenue NW, Cleveland, OH 44115,Tel: (800) 321-8194, Fax: (216) 566-1392, www.sherwin-williams.com Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. 2.2 Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products specified in this section from the same manufacturer.
MATERIALS A. Paints and Coatings - General: 1. Acceptable Products: As indicated in Schedule at the end of this Section. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not dilute or thin coatings, except as instructed.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3. Do not add additives, except as instructed or recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Accessories: Provide as required or as identified in the coating manufacturer's application instructions. Accessories include but are not limited to thinners, sealers, primers, cleaning agents, etching agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry immediately prior to application. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer. Examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and contaminants that could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions. Correct conditions that could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
D.
E.
3.2
PREPARATION A. B. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to coating application. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; cover stains and marks which cannot be completely removed with isolating primer or sealer recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent bleed-through. Remove Mildew, Algae, and Fungus using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer. Remove dust and loose particulate matter from surfaces to receive coatings immediately prior to coating application. Remove or protect adjacent hardware, electrical equipment plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings.
D. E. F.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT G. H. I. Move or protect equipment and fixtures adjacent to surfaces indicated to receive coatings to allow application of coatings. Protect adjacent surfaces not indicated to receive coatings. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for specified coatings and indicated materials, using only methods and materials recommended by coating manufacturer, and as follows: Galvanized Steel (not passivated): Clean with a water-based industrial strength cleaner in accordance with SSPC-SP1, followed by a clean water rinse; or wipe down surfaces using clean, lint-free cloths saturated with xylene or lacquer thinner; followed by wiping the surface dry using clean, lint-free cloths. Rusty galvanizing requires minimum of Hand Tool Cleaning per SSPC-SP2. After surface has been prepared, apply recommended primer to a small area. Allow primer to cure for 7 days, and test adhesion using the cross-hatch adhesion tape test method in accordance with ASTM D 3359. If the adhesion of the primer is positive, proceed with a recommended coating system for galvanized metal. Passivated Galvanized Steel: Clean with a water-based industrial strength cleaner, and/or Brush Blast in accordance with SSPC-SP7. After the surface has been prepared, apply recommended primer to a small area. Allow primer to cure for 7 days, and test adhesion using the cross-hatch adhesion tape test method in accordance with ASTM D 3359. If the adhesion of the primer is positive, proceed with a recommended coating system for galvanized metal. The Contractor may utilitze a rust treatment (i.e. Permatex Rust Treatment, or approved equal) in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation.
J.
K.
L.
3.3
APPLICATION A. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated surface; thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other application imperfections are not permitted. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each coat before applying next coat. Inspect each coat before applying next coat; touch-up surface imperfections with coating material, feathering, and sanding if required; touch-up areas to achieve flat, uniform surface without surface defects visible from 5 feet (1.5 m). Do not apply succeeding coat until Architect has approved previous coat; only Architect-approved coats will be considered in determining number of coats applied.
B. C.
D.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT E. F. G. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat. Where coating application abuts other materials or other coating color, terminate coating with a clean sharp termination line without coating overlap. Where color changes occur between adjoining spaces, through framed openings that are of same color as adjoining surfaces, change color at outside stop corner nearest to face of closed door. Re-prepare and re-coat unsatisfactory finishes; refinish entire area to corners or other natural terminations.
H. 3.4
CLEANING A. Clean excess coating materials, and coating materials deposited on surfaces not indicated to receive coatings, as construction activities of this section progress; do not allow to dry. Re-install hardware, electrical equipment plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items that have been removed to protect from contact with coatings. Reconnect equipment adjacent to surfaces indicated to receive coatings. Relocate to original position equipment and fixtures that have been moved to allow application of coatings. Remove protective materials.
B.
C. D. E. 3.5
PROTECTION A. B. Protect completed coating applications from damage by subsequent construction activities. Repair to Architect's acceptance coatings damaged by subsequent construction activities. Where repairs cannot be made to Architect's acceptance, re-apply finish coating to nearest adjacent change of surface plane, in both horizontal and vertical directions.
3.6
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Metals: 1. Galvanized Surfaces not subject to abrasion: Prime with one coat Duron Dura Clad 62 Universal Acrylic Metal Primer, Off White, DU0033305, or Sherwin-Williams DTM Wash Primer, B71Y00002. Galvanized Surfaces subject to abrasion: Prime with Sherwin-Williams DTM Wash Primer, B71Y00002. 2. Finish Semi-Gloss Acrylic: Two coats Duron Weathershield Exterior 100 percent Acrylic Coating, Semi-Gloss, DU0003 Series or Two
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT Coats Sherwin Williams Sher-cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic, B66-350 Series. END OF SECTION 09 90 00
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for the preparation of surfaces for re-painting and the application of interior paint. 1.02 REFERENCES: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest issue of the publications shall be used. A. Federal Standards (FED-STD) 313 (Change Notice 2) Material Safety Data Sheets Preparation and Submission B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products
ASTM D5116
ASTM D6670
C. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Maintenance and Repainting Manual 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330 requirements.
A. Manufacturer's Catalog Data: Submit manufacturer's data for paint, including substrate preparation requirements, recommended primer application, paint application instructions and material safety data sheet (MSDS) for each product to be used. B. Samples: Paint: Submit manufacturers full range of paint colors for initial selection by COTR. If requested by the COTR, the Contractor shall submit larger 12 x 12 samples for not more than three colors for final selection. C. Certificates of Compliance: For each type of coating, sealant, or other product furnished, submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the product conforms to requirements of the referenced specification. Contractor must submit certification that all coating products are lead free. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 1
A. Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall show proof prior to the commencement of work. When requested, the Contractor shall provide a list of the last three comparable interior repainting job including name, location, completion dates and value of work. B. Field Samples and Tests: The Contractor with the COTR may be required to take onepint samples of paint at random from the products delivered to the job site and test them to verify that the products either conform to the referenced specifications or the approved substitution. Products that do not conform shall be removed from the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced specification or the approved substitution. C. Mock-Up: If requested by the COTR, the Contractor shall finish all surfaces required to be painted in one room designated by the COTR. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by COTR Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in sealed, labeled containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand designation, specification number, batch number, color, and date of manufacture. 1.06 SAFETY METHODS: Conform to work place safety regulations for storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint related materials in accordance with the following: A. Conform to the requirements of the chemical manufacturer when using mineral spirits, or other chemicals. Use impermeable gloves, chemical goggles or face shield, and other recommended protective clothing and equipment to avoid exposure of skin, eyes, and respiratory system. Conduct work in a manner to minimize exposure of building occupants and the general public. B. The appropriate OSHA standard in 29 CFR 1910.1025 for surface preparation on painted surfaces containing lead and other toxic ingredients. C. 29 CFR 1910.1000-SUBPART Z. D. Threshold Limit Values (R) of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. E. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. Interior Coatings: Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. Apply
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT coatings when surfaces to be painted are dry and the following surface temperatures can be maintained: 1. Between 65 and 95F during the application of enamels and varnishes. 2. Between 50 and 95F during the application of other coatings. 1.08 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED:
A. Painting Included: Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless indicated otherwise: 1. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts. 2. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color-coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work. 3. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work. 4. Access panels, doors, grilles or metal accessories, shall be painted to match the wall or ceiling on which they are located. B. Painting Excluded: Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise: 1. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panel boards, fixed ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place. 2. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, and chases. 3. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, and brass. 1.09 EXTRA PRODUCT: The Contractor shall provide one unopened, pre-mixed quart of each type, color, and sheen of each coating used. All containers shall be clearly labeled with manufacturers product information, local vendor and name/formula for tinting. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS: Provide materials (primers, paint varnishes, fillers, thinners solvents, etc.) listed in the latest edition of the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Approved Product List. All materials shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used. A. Interior Wall Primer: Provide Benjamin Moore, ECO SPEC Interior Latex Primer Sealer or approved equal. B. Interior Wall Paint: Provide Benjamin Moore ECO SPEC Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. C. Interior Metal Door Frames: Provide Benjamin Moore ECO SPEC Interior Latex SemiGloss or approved equal.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL: Unless otherwise noted, all areas shall be repainted in their entirety, from interior corner to interior corner. Repainting shall not stop in the middle of an interior partition or ceiling, but shall extend to include the entire wall or ceiling, or as directed by the COTR. The intersection with areas not scheduled to be painted shall be straight and clean and free of runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, or other similar defects. 3.02 PROTECTION OR AREAS AND SPACES: Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION: Prepare all interior surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual. Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturers instructions for surface preparation if more stringent than MPI. 3.04 APPLICATION:
A. Coating Application: Apply coating materials in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual. A minimum of 2 coats of finish color shall be required. Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be brushed or rubbed clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material. B. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive the next coat. C. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by the manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats. D. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors. E. Equipment: Apply coatings with approved brushes or rollers, unless specified otherwise.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. Thinning of Paints: Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is mandatory for the type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the COTR to use thinners. The written request shall include quantities and types of thinners to use, and manufacturers approved. G. Coating Systems: Apply coatings that conform to the following: 1. Interior Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: One (1) coat of primer and two (2) coats of latex eggshell enamel. 2. Interior Doors and Frames: One (1) coat of primer and two (2) coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. H. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the minimum dry film thickness. 3.05 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE: In addition to meeting the previously specified requirements, demonstrate the mobility of moving components, including but not limited to swinging doors, for inspection by the COTR. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of the coatings have elapsed.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIAPL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT
SECTION 12 24 13 TRANSPARENT PLASTIC WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY This Section includes requirements for material, fabrication and installation of transparent plastic window shades for use in Airport Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) cab. Shades shall be installed on all exposures of the cab. The use of single or dual shades is specified on the drawings. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For plastic window shades; include a materials list., documentation stating physical characteristics, flame resistance, mildew, and germicidal characteristics. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining Work. 1. C. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.2 A. B.
Samples. Submit three (3) 12-inch square samples showing color and thickness of material. Submit a hand sample of the roller and hardware for inspection prior to the fabrication of the shades. Maintenance data and Manufacturers instructions. Manufacturers preprinted installation instructions for ATCT shades and accessories. Manufacturers preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for ATCT shades and accessories including aging report with the recommended replacement schedules. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Shade material shall be manufactured from a polyester type polymer in accordance with Federal Specification L-P-377b "Polyethylene Terephthalate Plastic Film" for type weatherable DuPont Mylar clear sheet film or other manufacturer approved by the COTR. Fire resistant rated self-extinguishing to very slow burning U.S. Testing Company, fire test 302; melting point 500 deg. F, combustion 977 deg. F. no toxic hazard.
D.
E. 1.3 A.
TRANSPARENT PLASTIC WINDOW SHADES
12 24 12 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIAPL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Transparent Plastic Shade Film Construction: Shade product shall consist of a 5 mil, 3ply laminated polyester film. Two sheets of polyester vat dyed gray, hard coat S/R applied to one side. The final film construction shall be 5 gage thick, optically clear and totally transparent. Surface tinting or color adhesives will not be acceptable. Visible Light Transmission: For single shade (primary) installation, shade shall transmit no more than 4 percent of the visible solar energy (from 380 to 780 nanometers) when measured by Association of Industrial Metalizers, Coaters, and Laminators (AIMCAL) Standard Methods. For dual/double shade installation, the secondary shade transmit nor more than 8 percent of the visible solar energy (from 380 to 780 nanometers) when measured by Association of Industrial Metalizers, Coaters, and Laminators (AIMCAL) Standard Methods. Ultra-Violet Transmission: Shade shall transmit no more than 2 percent of the ultraviolet solar energy (from 800 to 780 nanometers) when measured by AIMCAL Standard Methods. Total Solar Energy Rejected: Shade will reject 60.5 percent of the total solar energy transmitted (from 360 to 2100 nanometers) when measured by AIMCAL Standard Methods. 1. 2. 3. 1.4 A. Solar Absorptions: 61 percent. Shading Coefficient: 0.45. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40.
C.
D.
E.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer who can comply with applicable standard methods of the Association of Industrial Metalizers, Coaters, and Laminators (AIMCAL) for manufacture and fabrication of transparent plastic window shades. Manufacturer shall be recognized producer of transparent plastic window shades for the previous 10 years. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. WARRANTY Furnish to FAA three copies of the product warranty that certifies that all the specification requirements have been met.
B.
1.5 A.
12 24 12 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIAPL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. ROLLER SHADES Available Manufacturers: Provide products designed for this project by the following manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.2 A. Plastic-View ATC. Solar-Screen. Other manufacturer acceptable to the COTR.
ROLLER SHADE SYSTEM FABRICATION Bottom Bar: Shades shall have a flat 1-inch by 1/2 inch, dull black, full width metal hemline bar, minimum of 26 gage, at bottom onto which the pull cord and shade are attached. Black plastic caps shall be provided on each end of hemline bar to cover any sharp exposed edges. Shade Cords: Shade cords shall be black and of sufficient length to route around equipment to cord lock positions whenever required. The cords shall be 9/64 inch diameter rope made of 4.5 Duro Nylon and shall be attached underneath the center of the bottom of the hemline bar. Shade Rollers: Shades shall be mounted on a 1-3/4 inch diameter corrosion resistant metal wrapped roller. The rollers shall be spring loaded, single piece barrel, with a reusable safety cotter key type retainer installed through both end pins and washers to prevent roller from falling out of mounting brackets. Constant tensions in shades is required. Mounting Brackets: Provide mounting brackets with a 2-1/4 inch resting ledge. Standard ceiling brackets are not acceptable. A label stating "This End Down" with an arrow pointing in the proper installation direction of the roller into the mounting brackets shall be placed on the spring motor end of each shade roller. The shade film laminate material shall be mounted on rollers to minimize ridgings. Roll-off direction of material from roller shall be as directed by the shade manufacturer for use in the tower cab. Each shade shall have a label or whatever suitable means required to specify and identify the proper roll-off direction. Each shade shall have a manufacturer's label attached to the metal bar hemline giving cleaning instructions and the telephone number for emergency service. Lock Pulley. Lock pulleys shall consist of a roller and a spring return side action cam cord grip.
B.
C.
D.
E. F. G.
12 24 12 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIAPL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT H. Cord Direction Change Pulley: Provide cord direction change pulley which shall be used to route shade cord around obstructions where they exist. Pulleys shall be positioned in direct line with cord outlet on metal hemline. Shade Size: Shade roller width shall be within 1/2-inch of maximum possible width as determined by physical limitations. Shade material with shade fully drawn shall be to within 1 inch of columns on bias cut sides and to within 1-3/4 inch of columns on vertical cut sides. Horizontal seam shall be located a minimum of 70 inches from the bottom of the shade. Shades in ATCT cabs shall be bias cut when required. To ensure a safe roll-up, a minimum of 15 inches of shade material shall remain on the roller when the shade is fully extended. Measuring for Shades: Measuring for shades and positioning shall be strictly in accordance with the shade manufacturer's instructions. Marks showing the precise position of all brackets, pulleys, and metal hemline positions as related to the factory measuring instructions shall be provided. All measurements shall be taken per instructions from shade manufacturer.
I.
J.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. Shades shall be installed in shade recess pockets or on wood or metal plates. Shades shall follow the slope of cab glass as closely as practical within physical limitations of air ducts and other equipment. No drilling shall be done in vertical uprights of cab because some uprights may contain electrical cables. Spring tension in roller shall be manually adjusted so that shades roll comfortably and do not bind. In order to safely control and limit the shade travel, the installer shall make two knots in the shade cord. One knot shall be placed before the lock pulley to prevent the metal hemline bar from hitting the windowsill. The second know shall be placed after the lock pulley to prevent the metal hemline bar from hitting and overrunning the shade roller. Adherence to THIS END UP label when installing shade will prevent improper roller installation which can result in a locked shade situation when the metal bar hemline is near the lock pulley and cannot be pulled down to release the spring motor cam lock. Shade shall be able to operate at a moments notice; to gain unimpeded rapid access for the use of emergency light guns. The inability for one controller to snap-up the shade in an emergency endangers lives, and system that does not meet the unimpeded rapid access will not be approved.
C. D.
E.
12 24 12 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIAPL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. G. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION
12 24 12 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: The work required by this section includes of the following tasks. A. Remove the existing roof top unit, existing ductwork, and controls and replace with new roof top unit for the Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT). The new system shall consist of a 7.5 ton York Predator or equivalent with electric heat. The following shall be completed with the installation of the unit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove existing roof top unit and associated ductwork, power wiring and controls. Rig and set the new unit on a new seismic/vibration isolation roof-top curb. Fabricate and install a new galvanized sheet metal air distribution system to serve Air Traffic Control Tower cab. Externally wrap interior ductwork with 1 full face wrap. Provide new power and control wiring to the new units from the existing electrical panel. Provide and install new circuit breaker for unit. Remove two existing Computer Room Units and the their associated condensers. These units are located in the electronic equipment room. Remove the existing hot water and domestic water feeds to each unit. Install two new Computer Room Units in the equipment room with associated condensers. Existing power wiring will be reused for the CRUs and condensers. CRU disconnects shall be reused. Condenser disconnects shall be new.
B. Test and Balance new cab air conditioning system. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section of these specifications covers the general requirements of the mechanical work to be performed under Division 23 and shall not void any of the requirements specified under the General Conditions or Special Conditions of these specifications. B. The requirements specified herein shall be modified only if specified otherwise for particular application in other divisions. C. Work to be included under the "Work Included" of each mechanical section of the specification shall include all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary to furnish, deliver, unload, install, test and place in satisfactory operation the equipment, services and systems as called for under each mechanical section COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT including any incidental work not shown, or not specified but which can reasonably be inferred as belonging to the various systems and necessary in good practice to provide a complete and satisfactory operating system. D. Description of the work included in each section is not intended to in any way limit the above broad statement, but is intended as a more specific mention of the most important items included therein. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS
A. The following items of work are specified under other Divisions of these specifications. 1. Cutting and patching, flashing and counter flashing. 2. Concrete Pads. 3. Sealing of all mechanical penetrations through walls. 1.04 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS
A. All materials, including adhesives, surface coatings, sealers, assemblies of several materials, insulation, jacketing, finish, etc., shall have flame-spread rating of not over 25 (fire resistive), smoke-development rating of not over 50, and a fuelcontributed rating of not over 50, as established by tests conducted in accordance with the Federal Standard 00136B, National Bureau of Standards Radiant Energy Fire Test and the National Fire Code of the NFPA. B. These requirements shall apply to all circumstances whether the materials are field applied or have been applied by a manufacturer in his shop, or elsewhere, prior to delivery to the project for installation. 1.05 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Hangers, supports and vibration isolators for mechanical equipment and supports shall be designed to resist lateral seismic forces in accordance with the Uniform Building Code Zone 2A. Equipment and systems shall be attached so that all forces are ultimately transferred to the building structure. Piping and ductwork shall be adequately braced to prevent excessive swaying. Equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be restrained to limit horizontal and vertical motion. 1.06 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. All materials, equipment and installation work shall comply with the applicable requirements of all insuring agencies, Federal, state and local codes, laws, ordinances and regulations, including all society, associations or institute standards used as a code by federal, state or local governing agencies. B. If there is a conflict between the referenced standards, federal, state, or local codes, and this specification, it is the contractors responsibility to immediately bring the conflict to the attention of the COTR for resolution. Society, association, or institution standards shall supersede unless federal, state, or local codes are more
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT stringent. The contractor shall not attempt to resolve conflicts directly with the local personal unless specifically authorized by the COTR. 1.07 DEFINITIONS: Particular terminology used under this division is defined as follows: A. "Furnish" ---- Purchase and deliver to the project site, complete with every necessary appurtenance and support, all as part of the mechanical work. B. "Install" ---- Unload at the delivery point at the project and perform every operation necessary to establish a secure mounting and proper operation at the correct location in the project, as part of the mechanical work. C. "Provide" ---- Furnish and install. D. "Concealed" ---- Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in crawl spaces or shafts. E. "Exposed" ---- Not concealed F. "Wiring" ---- Any electrical work which consists of wires, cables, and specialty wiring systems taken altogether, complete with associated junction and pull boxes, outlet-boxes, joints, couplings, splices and connections except where limited to a lesser meaning by specific description.
G. "Air Conditioning" ---- Environmental control of temperature, humidity, cleanliness and air circulation, including the cooling of an enclosed space. H. "Air Conditioner" or "Air Conditioning Unit" ---- One or more field-erected or factory-made assemblies, which includes the refrigeration compressor-condenser assembly, for the handling and control of air temperature, humidity, and cleanliness used for cooling. I. 1.08 "Fan-Unit" ---- Any unit or assembly containing a fan, motor and drive. DRAWINGS
A. Unless otherwise specified in this division of these specifications, the contract and shop drawings shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. B. Contract Drawings. - The contract drawings are schematic and do not indicate all offsets and fittings which may be required. In general, the drawings are made to scale, but all working dimensions and measurements shall be taken from figured dimensions and in no case by scaling. The Contractor shall verify all figures and dimensions and shall be responsible for any and all errors in his work which might have been avoided thereby. Whether or not an error is believed to exist, deviation from the drawings and dimensions given thereon shall be made only after approval in writing is obtained from the Owner's representative. If discrepancies, errors or omissions on the drawings are noted or discovered, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner's representative in writing who shall promptly adjust the same. Any work performed after such discovery, without the approval of the Owner's representative, shall be at the Contractor's risk and expense.
23 05 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1.09 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with three (3) sets (minimum) operating, maintenance and service manuals for all the apparatus and equipment forming a part of the installation and provide a minimum of 8 man-hours of instruction by a company certified technical representative knowledgeable in the equipment and systems to the designated Owner's personnel, in the proper operation, use and preventative maintenance of all systems and equipment including controls 1.10 GUARANTEES
A. Unless otherwise specified in this division of the specification all equipment, labor and materials furnished shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance except normal wear and willful damage, against defective materials, design and workmanship. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems meet the performance requirements and the systems operate as specified. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of any failure or malfunction during the guarantee period, the defect shall be remedied promptly by and at the expense of the Contractor. B. All equipment warranty periods are to be in effect from the date of delivery to the Contractor, but the equipment warranty must be transferred to the Owner on the date of final acceptance of the contractual project. This does not reduce the period of one year guarantee by this Contract to be effective from the date of final acceptance of the contractual project. The Contractor shall remain responsible for any valid remainder of the warranty period beyond the termination of the one year guarantee of the contractual project, regardless of transfer of the warranty to the Owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
23 05 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY: The scope of this specification encompasses the necessary design and product specifications for the vibration isolation and seismic restraint of the roof top AHU and associated ductwork and piping. This Section includes the following: 1. Vibration Isolation/ Seismic Roof Curb. REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A 1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 2. ASTM A 325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 Ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 3. ASTM A 36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. ASTM A 575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades. 5. ASTM A 576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality. 6. ASTM B 603, Standard Specification for Drawn or Roller Iron-ChromiumAluminum Alloys for Electrical Heating Elements. C. International Code Council: 1. IBC, International Building Code. D. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): 1. MSS SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
B.
1.02
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: 23 5 48 - 1
VIBRATION& SEISMIC CONTROLS
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT A. Facility is an essential air traffic control facility. Design equipment, equipment bracing, and anchorage in accordance with the IBC. The requirements for seismic protection measures to be applied to electrical equipment and systems specified herein are in addition to any other items called for in other Sections of the Specification. Provide seismic bracing for equipment and systems within the project area. B. Seismic Zone: Provide bracing and anchorage for a minimum Seismic Zone 2A requirements with an importance factor of 1.5. The design shall be in accordance with AFM 88-3, SMACNA (seismic hazard level A) and the UBC, the most stringent shall govern. 1.04 A. B. DEFINITIONS The IBC: International Building Code. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt, or stud, or a fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor structure, roof structure, or wall that may move independent of other mobile structural elements during an earthquake. Positive Attachment: A cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double-sides beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single-sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. Transverse Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe or duct. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe or duct. Failure: For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8-inch and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4-inch. SUBMITTALS: A. B. C. General: Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 23 5 48 - 2
C.
D.
E. F. G.
1.04
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT

1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2inch deflection in x, y, and z planes.
D. E. F.
Welding certificates. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an independent laboratory or acoustician. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE: Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." A. COORDINATION: A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into 23 5 48 - 3
1.06
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in DIVISION 3. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. EXTRA MATERIALS: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers.
B. 1.07 C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. ROOF CURBS All rooftop air-handling units shall be supported by vibration isolation curbs as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control Model ESR-2 or equivalent. The vibration isolation curbs shall be complete assemblies designed to resiliently support equipment at the specified elevation and shall constitute a fully enclosed air- and weather-tight system. The isolation curb shall consist of an upper support rail with supply and return duct supports on which the equipment and duct openings rest and a lower support curb which is attached to the roof structure, separated by free-standing, unhoused, laterally stable steel springs. The upper support rail shall provide continuous structural support for the rooftop equipment and shall be designed to provide isolation against casingradiated vibration in the rooftop equipment housing and structure borne vibration from rotating and mechanical equipment in the rooftop package. The upper support rail shall consist of a structural channel with sufficient elevation above the spring to preclude interference with the rooftop equipment and permit access to inspect the isolation system after placement of the rooftop equipment. Support of the RTU by weather seal attachment bolt heads is not permitted. The lower support curb shall be a formed channel fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel with a continuous 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch (38 mm x 38 mm) nominal wood nailer attached to the isolation support pedestals. The isolation support pedestal, which includes the seismic and wind load restraints, shall be bolted or welded to the building support steel to suitably transfer seismic and wind load forces to the building structure. The lower support curb shall have a minimum elevation of 14 inches (356 mm) from the top of the wood nailer to the base of the curb. 23 5 48 - 4
B.
C.
D.
E.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT F. Spring components shall be (2 inch/51 mm) deflection, free-standing, unhoused, laterally stable steel springs. Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness and shall be designed for a typical 50% overload to solid. All springs shall have an polyester powder coated finish and be color coded to indicate load capacity. Spring coils shall rest on minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) neoprene noise pads. Seismic and wind load restraints shall be designed to limit movement in all directions. Restraint components shall include neoprene snubbers at all contact points for energy absorption. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact. The isolation curb shall be designed to withstand horizontal wind loads of 125 mph (200 km/h) and seismic forces of 1g. The vibration isolation curb shall be air and weather tight using an elastomeric seal, which is attached to the upper support f Frame with a galvanized steel clip. The seal shall extend down past the wood nailer of the lower support assembly and flash over the roof material at the wood nailer on the lower support curb. The seal shall be Class A, as tested in accordance with approved Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., provisions. Metal or combination metal and elastomer seals are not permitted. The seal may not be penetrated for isolator adjustment. The isolation curb system shall be complete with cross-bracing as required as a part of the upper and lower assemblies. Supply and return flex connector support hardware shall be supplied for installation by the contractor in the field. The supports will be clearly marked and dimensioned on the submittal and installation drawings. The support hardware shall be cut-to-length, galvanized steel channels supported and connected with stamped and punched galvanized steel duct support hangers. The support hangers shall allow the support elevation to be equal to or lower than the equipment rail elevation. Supply air and return duct shall be flexibly attached by the contractor to prevent transmission of vibration to the building structure.
G.
H. I. J.
K. L.
M. The isolation curb assemblies shall be shipped to the job site with the upper support rail, lower support curb, springs and restraints completely assembled. The contractor shall be required to assemble the four corners, attach the curb to the roof structure, install cross-bracing and flex connector supports as necessary, and install and attach rooftop equipment. N. Vibration isolators shall be selected by the manufacturer for each specific application to comply with deflection requirements as shown on the Vibration Isolation Schedule or as indicated on the project documents.
23 5 48 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION: Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION:
A.
B. C. 3.02
Installation of all vibration isolation materials and supplemental equipment bases specified in this section shall be accomplished as per the manufacturers written instructions and adjust mountings to level equipment. On completion of installation (as per KNC provided installation documents) of all isolation materials and before startup of isolated equipment all debris shall be cleared from areas surrounding and from beneath all isolated equipment, leaving equipment free to move on the isolation supports. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration isolation system herein specified. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of isolated equipment. Ensure pipe, duct and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system flexibility. Ensure that pipe, conduit and duct passing through walls and floors do not transmit vibrations. Unless indicated otherwise, piping connected to isolated equipment shall be isolated as follows: Up to (NPS) 4 Diameter: first 3 points of support. (NPS) 5 Diameter to (NPS) 8 Diameter: first 4 points of support. (NPS) 10 Diameter and Over: first 6 points of support. First point of support shall have a static deflection equal to the deflection of isolated equipment; with a maximum of 2 (50 mm). Subsequent support points shall have a static deflection no less than 1 (25mm). Deflection shall be not less than that for the equipment to which the piping is connected.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
23 5 48 - 6

I.
Block and shim level bases so that the ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. Ensure that there is no physical contact between isolated equipment and building structure. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
3.03
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance. 2. Isolator deflection. 3. Snubber minimum clearances. ADJUSTING:
3.04
A.
Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. Adjust active height of spring isolators. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. CLEANING:
B.
C. D. E.
F.
3.05
A.
After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE: Equipment Roof Top Unit Isolation Type Roof Curb
3.06
END OF SECTION VIBRATION& SEISMIC CONTROLS 23 5 48 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: This section covers final air and water balance operations to the building after construction of the air and water systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 23 31 13: Ductwork Section 23 74 00: Rooftop Units
1.03 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS: The following specification and standards, of the issues currently in force, form a part of this section and are applicable as specified herein: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S1.4 Sound Level Meters B. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).-A-89 Balancing National Standards for Testing and
C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Standards for Testing and Balancing
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not used.)
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
AIR BALANCE
A. PROCEDURES FOR AIR BALANCE: Do not begin balancing and testing until systems have been completed, cleaned and are in full working order. Replace dirty filters with new filters. Do not operate any fan system without the complete set(s) of related filter media installed as applies. Put all systems into full operation and continue during each working day of balancing and testing. Ensure that all lights are on during testing. 3.02 TEST PROCEDURE FOR AIR SYSTEMS
A. The Testing Agency shall perform the following tests, and balance systems in accordance with the following requirements. B. Check and adjust fan rpm to design requirements and record fan motor amperes. C. Test and record fan motor amperes at design rpm. D. Test, adjust and record system static pressures, suction and discharge ducts. E. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air CFM.
TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. Test and record entering air temperatures (D.B. Heating and Cooling). G. Test and record entering air temperatures (W.B. Cooling). H. Test and record leaving air temperatures (D.B. Heating and Cooling). I. Test and record leaving air temperatures (W.B. Cooling). J. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM. K. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return (as applies). L. Test and adjust each diffuser, and register to within ten (10) percent of design requirements (as applies). M. Each diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and area. Readings and tests of diffusers and registers shall include required fpm (feet per minute) velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. N. The air balance and testing agency shall check all controls for proper calibration and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. O. All diffusers and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas. P. All fans shall be tested and adjusted to meet the design requirements and final ampere readings shall be taken and recorded. Q. As a part of the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall make any adjustments to the pulleys, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance, as recommended by the Testing Agency, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.03 REPORTS: Include four copies of final balance and test reports with the following data:
A. Tabulate final air volumes at supply and return air diffusers, grilles and registers. Include exhaust grilles, other than toilet exhaust, and exhaust hoods, where applicable. B. Record temperatures indoors and outdoors. C. Record entering and leaving dry bulb temperatures of air handling units. D. Electrical motor load data.
3.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. WARRANTY Within 90 days after completion of balancing and testing, the Contracting Officer's Representative may request a recheck or resetting of any outlet or fan listed in test report. Provide technicians and equipment necessary to assist the engineer as required in making tests during this period. B. REPORTS All balancing and testing shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer's Representative or his representative. Submit to the Engineer a complete test log of the system TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT performance for all of the tested systems including all static pressures, grille velocities, temperatures, control positions for valves, dampers, set point adjusters, switches, stats, etc., as well as supply, exhaust, and return air quantities for each air handling unit or fan device as applies. 3.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Balance and test reports
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93 - 3
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications 1.02 A. 1.03 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C: 1.Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 230 psig. 2.Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 380 psig . SUBMITTALS
1.04
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. 1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type A or B). B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inchlong assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.02 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24 -V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 8. Manual operator. C. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. D. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. E. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2.03 REFRIGERANTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane. D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane. PART 3 3.01 EXECUTION
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Suction Lines: Copper, Type L (B), drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type L (B), drawn temper tubing and wroughtcopper fittings with soldered joints. C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR K (A) L (B), drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. 3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A AND R-407C
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-5/8 (DN 40) and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR L annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. 3.03 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install service valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Except as otherwise indicated, install service valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. D. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers. E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suctionline pressure at bulb location. G. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. H. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. I. 3.04 Install flexible connectors at compressors. PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT I. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. P. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures: 1. Shot blast the interior of piping. 2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing by means of a wire or electrician's tape. 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be open to allow unrestricted flow. Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation. D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded. H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M. I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.06
A. Install the following pipe attachments: REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/8: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-5/8: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. C. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. a. b. c. d. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
3.08
SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers .If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig . REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. 3.09 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. 3.10 INSULATION
A. Exterior Refrigerant Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric-Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials: 1 inch thick. 3.11 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Exposed: PVC: 30 mils thick. END OF SECTION
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE.- This section provides for furnishing and installing low velocity ductwork and includes duct construction, support and accessories and insulation. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 23 05 00: Mechanical General Section 23 05 93: Testing and Balancing SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00:
1.03
A. Manufacturers Catalog Data B. Ductwork layout plans. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION: Adhere to the drawings as closely as possible. The Contractor may vary run and shape of ducts and make offsets during progress of work if required to meet structural or other interferences. In critical and highly congested areas requiring services coordination, Contractor shall verify proposed variations with the approval of the COTR prior to proceeding with the work. Submit ductwork layout plans for approval. 1.05 SIZING: Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying duct sizes on drawings and shall adjust new ductwork to fit. 1.06 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS: The following specification and standards, of the issues currently in force, form a part of this section and are applicable as specified herein: C. National Protection Association (NFPA). - 90A Standard for the installation of Air Conditioning Systems D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible 2. HVAC Systems - Testing Adjusting and Balancing E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL). - 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors F. National Environmental Balancing Bureau. (N.E.B.B.)
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Duct material: Except for the special ducts specified elsewhere, use prime galvanized steel sheets or coils up to 60 inches wide. Stencil each sheet with gage and manufacturer's name. Stencil coils of sheet steel throughout on 10-foot centers with gage and manufacturer's name. B. Rectangular: Provide rectangular low pressure ducts constructed of sheet metal in the following minimum gages: 1. Low pressure ductwork (1-inch static pressure or less).Reinforced ductwork.- S.M.A.C.N.A. Reinforcement Largest Dimension (inches) 12 or less 13 to 22 23 to 24 25 to 26 27 to 30 31 to 36 37 to 42 43 to 54 55 to 60 61 to 72 73 to 84 85 and above U.S. Gage 26 24 24 24 22 22 22 20 20 20 18 18 Code Class -N.A.A B B C D D E F G I I Spacing (feet) -N.A.10 10 8 10 8 5 5 5 4 5 3.5
Unreinforced ductwork Largest Dimension (inches) 12 or less 13 to 14 15 to 18 19 to 20 21 to 26 27 to 30 U.S. Gage 26 24 22 20 18 16
2. Low pressure ductwork (greater than 1-inch and less than 2 inches static pressure) Reinforced ductwork - S.M.A.C.N.A. Reinforcement Largest Dimension U.S. Gage Code Class Spacing
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT (inches) 10 or less 11 to 12 13 to 18 19 to 22 23 to 26 27 to 28 29 to 30 31 to 36 37 to 42 43 to 48 49 to 54 55 to 72 Unreinforced ductwork Largest Dimension 10 or less 11 to 12 13 to 14 15 to 18 19 to 20 21 to 24 U.S. Gage (inches) 26 24 22 20 18 16 (feet) -N.A.-N.A.8 8 8 8 8 5 5 5 5 4
26 24 24 22 22 20 20 22 22 20 18 18
-N.A.-N.A.A B C C D D E F G H
3. Variations.- Any variations to the above stipulated sheet metal gages or reinforcement shall fully comply with the requirements of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. Round.- N/A Diameter 12" and less 13" to 26" 27" to 36" 37" to 50" 52" to 60" U.S. Gage 26 24 22 20 18
2.02 DUCT SEALING/PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION: All ductwork experiencing a static pressure of 2 inches water gage or less (either positive or negative) shall be constructed to the 2-inch W.G. pressure classification with a Seal Class C (minimum) rating. 2.03 SELF-LOCKING DAMPER CONTROLS: Provide self-locking regulators on all adjustable dampers, splitters or extractors. Known acceptable source is Ventfabrics Inc. or approved equal.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 3
2.04 ACCESS DOORS: Weld door frame in place. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more galvanized steel hinges and tension fasteners. Provide doors as large as practical. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. 2.05 VOLUME DAMPERS: Provide volume dampers where indicated on drawings. Volume dampers shall be made of galvanized steel with a higher gauge than that of the ductwork. They shall be of the butterfly type and be equipped with a manual damper. 2.06 INTERIOR INSULATION: All interior duct insulation shall be externally wrapped fiber glass blanket with a vapor barrier facing suitable for either heating or cooling service. Thermal conductivity (Btu/hr square foot degrees F./in) shall not exceed 0.25 at 75 degrees F. Max. density shall be 1.5 lbs per cubic foot. Vapor barrier jacket shall be heavy-duty vapor barrier (FRK) consisting of laminated aluminum foil, glass reinforced and kraft paper. Perm rating shall be 0.01. The duct work from the A/C units shall be insulated including all CAB supply ducts. 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT: Flexible Duct shall be Insulated Flexmaster Triple Lock Buck Duct Flexible Air Duct as manufactured by Buckley Associates or equivalent. Flexible Duct Insulated and Non-Insulated shall be Underwriters Laboratory Listed and constructed in accordance with N.F.P.A. Standards 90A and 90B. It shall have a smoke/flame spread rating 50/25. PART 3 3.01 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
B. Construction standards.- Use construction methods which follow the requirements outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible and NFPA 90A. C. Reinforcement.- Reinforce ducts in accordance with the requirements hereinbefore specified and in accordance with recommended construction practice of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. D. Cross breaking.- Cross break sheet metal for rigidity, except ducts which are 12 inches or less in the longest dimension. E. Obstruction.- Install streamline deflectors at any point where dividing a sheet metal duct around piping or where other such obstruction is permitted. Where such obstructions occur in insulated ducts, fill space inside streamliner and around obstruction with glass fiber insulation. F. Horizontal ducts up to 60 inches.- Support horizontal ducts up to and including 60 inches in the greater dimension by means of band iron hangers sized and spaced
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible; Duct and Joint Reinforcement (Table 1-4 through 1-13) attached to the ducts by means of screws, rivets or clamps, and fastened to inserts with toggle bolts, beam clamps or other approved means. Use clamps to fasten hangers to reinforcing on sealed ducts. G. Vertical ducts.- Support vertical ducts where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 inch angles for ducts up to 60 inches. 3.02 DUCTS AND PLENUMS (HVAC) INSULATION:
A. Rigid Insulation: Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not more than 3 inches from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 12 inches on centers and secure with washers and clips. Spot weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof adhesive especially designed for use on metal surfaces. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. Each pin or anchor shall be capable of supporting a 20-pound load. Cut off protruding ends of pins, after clips are sealed with coating compound for inside work or manufacturer's recommended weatherproof coating for outside work, and reinforced with open weave glass membrane. B. Flexible Blanket Insulation: Apply insulation with all joints tightly butted. Secure insulation to ductwork with adhesive in 6-inch wide strips on 12 inch centers. Staple laps of jacket with outward clinching staples and seal with foil scrim kraft (FSK) tape. For ductwork over 24-inches on horizontal duct runs, provide pins, washers and clips. Use pins on sides of vertical ductwork being insulated. Space pins and clips on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corners. Carry insulation over standing seams and trapeze-type hangers. Install speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Sagging of flexible duct insulation will not be permitted. Cut off protruding ends of pins after clips are secured and sealed with coating compound for inside work. For warm air ducts, overlap insulation not less than 2 inches at joints and secure the laps with outward clinch staples on 4-inch centers. In cold air ducts, vapor seal all joints and staple as specified. C. Insulation Finishes and Joint Sealing: Fill all breaks, punctures, and voids with vapor barrier coating compound conforming to for inside work or manufacturers recommended weatherproof coating for outside service. Vapor seal all joints by embedding a single layer of 3-inch wide open weave glass membrane, 20 by 20 mesh maximum size between two 1/16-inch wet film thickness coats of vapor barrier coating compound. Draw glass fabric smooth and tight with a 1 1/2-inch overlap. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, fill voids in the insulation with vapor barrier coating. Brush a coat of vapor barrier coating where required on HVAC ducts. Provide vapor barrier jacket continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where height of projections is greater than insulation thickness, carry insulation and jacket over
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT the projection. For joints for heating only systems, provide insulation with two coats of fire resistant adhesive with glass fabric 20 by 20 maximum size mesh embedded between coats. D. Access Plates and Doors: On acoustically lined ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation on access plates and doors. On externally insulated ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation-filled hollow steel panels and doors for access openings. Bevel insulation around access plates and doors.
3.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Guarantee.- Guarantee all ductwork for 1 year from the date of final acceptance. The guarantee will cover workmanship, noise, chatter, whistling, leakage (air tightness), corrosion, and vibration. Ductwork must be free from pulsation under all conditions of operation. -END OF SECTION-
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 23 74 13 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. Roof top air handling units including integral components specified herein. B. Definitions: Roof Top Air Handling Unit(Roof Top Units, RTU): A factory fabricated assembly consisting of fan, coils, filters, and other necessary equipment to perform one or more of the following functions of circulating, cleaning, heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying, and mixing of air. Design capacities of units shall be as scheduled on the drawings. C. Provide unit as specified on schedule on ORH-704252-M002. Unit shall be a 7.5 ton Trane Precedent or equivalent with electric heat. D. The units shall be vertical airflow. Cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-410A, and 100 percent run tested to check cooling operation, fan and blower rotation, and control sequence before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance to UL 1995/CAN/CSA No. 236 M90 for Central Cooling Air Conditioners. E. Unit will be located on roof. 1.02 RELATED WORK: Refer to Article, Quality Assurance, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Handling Units Certification
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AHU
23 74 13 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. Air Handling Units with Housed Centrifugal Fans: The air handling units shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 430 and tested/rated in accordance with AHRI 260. 2. Air Handling Units with Plenum Fans: a. Air Handling Units with a single Plenum Fan shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 430 and tested/rated in accordance with AHRI 260. b. Air handling Units with Multiple Fans in an Array shall be tested and rated in accordance with AHRI 430 and AHRI 260. B. Heating, Cooling, and Air Handling Capacity and Performance Standards: AHRI 430, AHRI 410, ASHRAE 51, and AMCA 210. C. Performance Criteria: 1. The fan BHP shall include all system effects for all fans and v-belt drive losses for housed centrifugal fans. 2. The fan motor shall be selected within the rated nameplate capacity, without relying upon NEMA Standard Service Factor. 3. Select the fan operating point as follows: a. Forward Curve and Axial Flow Fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point. b. Air Foil, Backward Inclined, or Tubular Fans Including Plenum Fans: At or near the peak static efficiency but at an appropriate distance from the stall line. 4. Operating Limits: AMCA 99 and Manufacturers Recommendations. D. Units shall be factory-fabricated, assembled, and tested by a manufacturer, in business of manufacturing similar air-handling units for at least five (5) years. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES, furnish a complete submission for all roof top units covered in the project. The submission shall include all information listed below. Partial and incomplete submissions shall be rejected without reviews. PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AHU 23 74 13 - 2
A. The contractor shall, in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SHOP DRAWINGS,
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1. Submittals for RTUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, // humidifiers, // sound attenuators //, mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, // blender sections //, and all other related accessories. The contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air handling unit assembly including dimensions, operating weight, access sections, // diffusion plates //, flexible connections, door swings, controls penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights, duplex receptacles, switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support system, vibration isolators, drain pan, pressure drops through each component (filter, coil etc) and rigging points. 2. Submittal drawings of section or component only, will not be acceptable. Contractor shall also submit performance data including performance test results, charts, curves or certified computer selection data; data sheets; fabricationand insulation details; if the unit cannot be shipped in one piece, the contractor shall indicate the number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job site rigging requirements. 3. Submit sound power levels in each octave band for fan and at entrance and discharge of RTUs at scheduled conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal component attenuation. Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing material is not permitted. In absence of sound power ratings refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. 4. Provide fan curves showing Liters/Second (cubic feet per minute), static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for design point of operation and at maximum design Liters/Second (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure. 5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for RTU including total, inlet and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and unspecified internal losses. Refer to air handling unit schedule on drawings.
23 74 13 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare part lists, and wiring diagrams. D. Submit written test procedures two weeks prior to factory testing. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping. E. Completed System Readiness Checklists provided by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion, in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. F. Submit shipping information that clearly indicates how the units will be shipped in compliance with the descriptions below. 1. Units shall be shipped in one (1) piece where possible and in shrink wrapping to protect the unit from dirt, moisture and/or road salt. 2. If not shipped in one (1) piece, provide manufacturer approved shipping splits where required for installation or to meet shipping and/or job site rigging requirements in modular sections. Indicate clearly that the shipping splits shown in the submittals have been verified to accommodate the construction constraints for rigging as required to complete installation and removal of any section for replacement through available access without adversely affecting other sections. 3. If shipping splits are provided, each component shall be individually shrink wrapped to protect the unit and all necessary hardware (e.g. bolts, gaskets etc.) will be included to assemble unit on site (see section 2.1.A4). 4. Lifting lugs will be provided to facilitate rigging on shipping splits and joining of segments. If the unit cannot be shipped in one piece, the contractor shall indicate the number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job site rigging requirements. 1.05 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
23 74 13 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS
ROOF TOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. DESCRIPTION: Units shall be factory assembled, single package, (Electric cool /Electric Heat,), designed for outdoor installation. They shall have built in duct connections for down discharge supply/return and be available with factory installed options or field installed accessories. The units shall be factory wired, piped and charged with R-410A refrigerant and factory tested prior to shipment. All unit wiring shall be both numbered and color coded. The cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with DOE and ARI test procedures. Units shall be CSA certified to ANSI Z21.47 and UL 1995/CAN/CSA No. 236- M90 standards. B. UNIT CABINET Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with exterior surfaces coated with a non-chalking, powder paint finish, certified at 1000 hour salt spray test per ASTM-B117 standards. Indoor blower sections shall be insulated with up to 1 thick insulation coated on the airside. Aluminum foil faced insulation shall be used in the units compartments and be fastened to prevent insulation from entering the air stream. Cabinet doors shall be hinged with toolless access for easy servicing and maintenance. Full perimeter base rails shall be provided to assure reliable transit of equipment, overhead rigging, fork truck access and proper sealing on roof curb applications. Disposable 2 filters shall be furnished as standard and be accessible through hinged access door. Fan performance measuring ports shall be provided on the outside of the cabinet to allow accurate air measurements of evaporator fan performance without removing panels or creating bypass of the coils. Condensate pan shall be slide out design, constructed of a non corrosive material, internally sloped and conforming to ASHRAE 62-B9 standards. Condensate connection shall be a minimum of I.D. female and be rigid mount connection. C. INDOOR (EVAPORATOR) FAN ASSEMBLY Fan shall be a belt drive assembly and include an adjustable pitch motor pulley. Job site selected brake horsepower shall not exceed the motors nameplate horsepower rating plus the service factor. Units shall be designed to operate within the service factor. Fan
23 74 13 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT wheel shall be double inlet type with forward curve blades, dynamically balanced to operate smoothly throughout the entire range of operation. Airflow design shall be constant volume. Bearings shall be sealed and permanently lubricated for longer life and no maintenance. Entire blower assembly and motor shall be slide out design. D. OUTDOOR (CONDENSER) FAN ASSEMBLY The outdoor fans shall be of the direct drive type, discharge air vertically, have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel spider brackets and shall be dynamically balanced for smooth operation. The outdoor fan motors shall have permanently lubricated bearings internally protected against overload conditions and staged independently. A cleaning window shall be provided on two sides of the units for coil cleaning. E. REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS 1. Compressors: a. Shall be fully hermetic type, direct drive, internally protected with internal high-pressure relief and over temperature protection. The hermetic motor shall be suction gas cooled and have a voltage range of + or 10% of the unit nameplate voltage. b. Shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration and noise, and be externally isolated on a dedicated, independent mounting. 2. Coils: a. Evaporator coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed. Special Phenolic coating shall be required. b. c. Evaporator coils shall be of the direct expansion, draw-thru design. Condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed or MircoChannel aluminum tube, aluminum fins. d. Condenser coils shall be of the direct expansion, draw-thru design.
23 74 13 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3. Refrigerant Circuit and Refrigerant Safety Components shall include: a. b. c. Independent fixed-orifice or thermally operated expansion devices. Solid core filter drier/strainer to eliminate any moisture or foreign matter. Accessible service gage connections on both suction and discharge lines to charge, evacuate, and measure refrigerant pressure during any necessary servicing or troubleshooting, without losing charge. d. The unit shall have two independent refrigerant circuits, equally split in 50% capacity increments. 4. Unit Controls: a. b. Unit shall be complete with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by a resettable circuit breaker on the 24-volt transformer side. Unit shall incorporate a lockout circuit which provides reset capability at the space thermostat or base unit should any of the following standard safety devices trip and shut off compressor: c. Loss-of-charge/Low-pressure switch. i. High-pressure switch. ii. Freeze-protection thermostat, evaporator coil. If any of the above safety devices trip, an LED (light-emitting diode) indicator shall flash a diagnostic code that indicates which safety switch has tripped. d. e. f. g. h. i. Unit shall incorporate AUTO RESET compressor over temperature, over current protection. Unit shall operate with conventional thermostat designs and have a low voltage terminal strip for easy hook-up. Unit control board shall have on-board diagnostics and fault code display. Standard controls shall include anti-short cycle and low voltage protection, and permit cooling operation down to 0 F. Control board shall monitor each refrigerant safety switch independently. Control board shall retain last 5 fault codes in non-volatile memory, which will not be lost in the event of a power loss.
23 74 13 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. ELECTRIC HEATING SECTION An electric heating section shall be provided, with nickel chromium elements, shall be 25.5 KW. The heating section shall have a primary limit control(s) (automatic reset) to prevent the heating element system from operating at an excessive temperature. The Heating Section assembly shall slide out of the unit for easy maintenance and service. Units with Electric Heating Sections shall be wired for a single point power supply with branch circuit fusing (where required). G. UNIT OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F outdoor temperature, exceeding maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 340/360. The compressor, with standard controls, shall be capable of operation down to 0 F outdoor temperature. H. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory provided location Unit power and control wiring shall be fed from the bottom. I. STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTIES - Compressor 5 Years, Heat Exchanger 10 Years, Elect. Heat Elem. 5 Years, Parts 1 Year J. FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONAL OUTDOOR AIR (Shall be made available by either/or): 1. ELECTRONIC ENTHALPY AUTOMATIC ECONOMIZER Outdoor and return air dampers that are interlocked and positioned by a fully-modulating, spring-return damper actuator. The maximum leakage rate for the outdoor air intake dampers shall not exceed 2% when dampers are fully closed and operating against a pressure differential of 0.5 IWG. A unit-mounted potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the outdoor and return air damper assembly to take in outdoor air to meet the minimum ventilation requirement of the conditioned space during normal operation. During economizer operation, a mixed-air temperature control shall modulate the outdoor and
23 74 13 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT return air damper assembly to prevent the supply air temperature from dropping below 55 F. Changeover from compressor to economizer operation shall be provided by an integral electronic enthalpy control that feeds input into the basic module. The outdoor intake opening shall be covered with a rain hood that matches the exterior of the unit. Water eliminator/filters shall be provided. Simultaneous economizer/compressor operation is also possible. Dampers shall fully close on power loss. Available with barometric relief or power exhaust. 2. MOTORIZED OUTDOOR AIR DAMPERS Outdoor and return air dampers that are interlocked and positioned by a 2-position, spring-return damper actuator. The maximum leakage rate for the outdoor air intake dampers shall not exceed 2% when dampers are fully closed and operating against a pressure differential of 0.5 IWG. A unit-mounted potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the outdoor and return air damper assembly to take in the design CFM of outdoor air to meet the ventilation requirements of the conditioned space during normal operation. Whenever the indoor fan motor is energized, the dampers open up to one of two pre-selected positions regardless of the outdoor air enthalpy. Dampers return to the fully closed position when the indoor fan motor is de-energized. Dampers shall fully close on power loss. K. REQUIRED FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONS 1. ALTERNATE INDOOR BLOWER MOTOR Provide high static indoor blower motor. See mechanical schedule on M002 for details. 2. Variable Air Volume (VAV) The VAV option using a varible frequency drive (VFD) shall be available on 6-1/2 through 12-1/2 ton, ZF models for applications requiring a constant supply-duct static pressure. Unts equipped for VAV shall be controlled by a duct pressure transducer with a 0 - 5 WC pressure range. The pressure transducer shall provide a 0 - 5 VDC output signal to a VAV control board which, in turn shall provide a 2 - 10 VDC speed reference signal to the VFD. The VAV control board shall operate using factory-installed Supply Air, Return Air and Outside Air Temperature Sensors
23 74 13 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT with a nominal resistance of 10,000 Ohms. Units equipped with VFDs shall have factory-installed manual bypass as an option. 3. CONVENIENCE OUTLET (POWERED/NON-POWERED) Unit shall be provided with an optional 120VAC GFCI outlet with cover on the corner of the unit housing the compressors. 4. ELECTRIC HEAT Provide 25.5 KW of electric heat in the unit. 5. PHASE MONITOR Provide unit with phase monitor designed to prevent damage in out-of-phase condition. 6. COIL GUARD Provide unit with coil guard to prevent condenser coil damage. 7. DIRTY FILTER SWITCH Provide unit with a differential pressure switch that energizes the fault light on the unit thermostat, indicating that there is an abnormally high-pressure drop across the filters. 8. BREAKER Provide a factory installed HACR breaker on unit. 9. SMOKE DETECTOR Provide a factory mounted smoke detector wired in the supply and return air compartments. L. CONTROLS 1. Thermostat Provide and install programmable electronic thermostat with unit, to be located in the field. Coordinate with COTR for location. M. OTHER REQUIRED ACCESSORIES 1. BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPER (Unit mounted Downflow, Duct Mounted Horizontal) Contains a rain hood, air inlet screen, exhaust damper and mounting hardware. Used to relieve internal air pressure through the unit during economizer operation. 2. ECONOMIZER (Downflow and Horizontal flow) 3. POWER EXHAUST (Unit mount Downflow, Duct mount Horizontal flow) 4. DUAL ENTHALPY KIT - Provides a second input to economizer to monitor return air.
23 74 13 - 10
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 3 3.01 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION handling, testing and operation. Repair damaged galvanized areas with paint in accordance with Military Spec. DOD-P-21035A. Repair painted units by touch up of all scratches with finish paint material. Vacuum the interior of air-handling units clean prior to operation.
A. Assemble roof top unit components following manufacturer's instructions for
B. Install seismic restraints for roof top units. Refer to specification Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Leakage and test requirements for roof top units shall be the same as specified for ductwork in Specification Section 23 31 13, METAL DUCTS except leakage shall not exceed Leakage Class (C L ) 12 listed in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual when tested at 1.5 times the design static pressure. Repair casing air leaks that can be heard or felt during normal operation and to meet test requirements. D. Seal and/or fill all openings between the casing and RTU components and utility connections to prevent air leakage or bypass. 3.02 STARTUP SERVICES permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated and fan has been test run under observation. B. After the air handling unit is installed and tested, provide startup and operating instructions to FAA personnel. C. An authorized factory representative should start up, test and certify the final installation and application specific calibration of control components. Items to be verified include fan performance over entire operating range, noise and vibration testing, verification of proper alignment, overall inspection of the installation, Owner/Operator training, etc. END OF SECTION PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AHU 23 74 13 - 11
A. The air handling unit shall not be operated for any purpose, temporary or
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 23 81 23 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies process cooling split systems air conditioning unit. B. Definitions: 1. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): A ratio calculated by dividing the cooling capacity in Btuh by the power input in watts at any given set of rating conditions, expressed in Watts (Btu/h) per watt. 2. Coefficient of Performance (COP): A ratio calculated by dividing the change in heating or cooling capacity (Btu/h) to the energy consumed by the system (kW), expressed in Btu/kWh. 3. Unitary (AHRI): Consists of one or more factory-made assemblies, which normally include an evaporator or cooling coil, a compressor and condenser combination, and may include a heating function. 4. CRU Units: Computer Room Units (Air Conditioning).
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Requirements for pre-test of equipment. B. Section 23 00 00, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. C. Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, and BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Requirements and for ducts and piping insulation. D. Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping. E. Section 23 05 93: TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system. F. Division 26 - ELECTRICAL. Requirements for electrical requirements. COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 81 23 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with specification Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data, rated capacities (at design indoor and outdoor conditions), EER/COP, operating characteristics, required specialties and accessories. Submit published catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with required sensible ratio. 1. Indoor Air Conditioning Unit 2. Air Cooled Condensing Unit C. Submit detailed equipment assemblies with dimensions, operating weights, required clearances. D. Submit wiring diagrams for power, alarm and controls. E. Certification: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a proof of certification:
1.05
GUARANTEE The unit shall be guaranteed against all mechanical defects in material, parts or workmanship and shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense within the period of one year from final acceptance. Contractor shall adhere to a four hour service response time to troubles during the guarantee period.
1.06
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec): 00-A-374C-95 ........................Air-Conditioners with Remote Condensing Units or Remote Air-cooled and Water-Cooled Condenser Units, Unitary
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
23 81 23 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT TT-C-490D-93 .......................Cleaning Methods for Ferrous Surfaces and Pretreatments for Organic Coatings C. Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards: 210/240-08 .............................Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and AirSource Heat Pump Equipment 340/360-07 .............................Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment 410-01 ....................................Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils 460-2005 ................................Performance Rating of Remote Mechanical-Draft AirCooled Refrigerant Condensers 520-04 ....................................Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units AHRI-DCPP ..........................Directory of Certified Product Performance - Applied Directory of Certified Products D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 210-07 ....................................Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI) 410-96 ....................................Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial Fans E. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 15-10 ......................................Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI) 90.1-10 ...................................Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings (ANSI Approved; IESNA Cosponsored) 2008 Handbook......................HVAC Systems and Equipment 2010 Handbook......................Refrigeration 52.1-92 ...................................Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing AirCleaning Devices used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter F. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 81 23 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B117-09..................................Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus G. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): MG 1-09 (R2010) ..................Motors and Generators (ANSI) H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 70-11 ......................................National Electrical Code 90A-09 ...................................Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS 28 KW (8 TONS) AND LARGER
A. Description: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, and controls. B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel, braced for rigidity, and supporting compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings. C. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges, and concealed fastening devices. D. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with - 25-mm (1-inch) thick 24 kg/m3 (1.5 lb /ft3) high-density mineral fiber duct liner coated on airstream side. E. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007. F. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors to match equipment. G. Floor Stand: Welded tubular steel, __________high, with adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads. H. Supply-Air Fan(s): Double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced. I. Drive: 1. Forward-Curved Centrifugal Fan(s): V-belt, with steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings and cast-iron or steel sheaves, variable and adjustable-pitch motor sheave,
23 81 23 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT minimum of two matched belts, with drive rated at a minimum of two times the nameplate rating of motor. J. Compressors: The compressor shall be semi-hermetic with a suction gas cooled motor, vibration isolators, thermal overloads, oil sight glass, automatic reset high pressure switch with control lockout after three failures, pump-down low pressure transducer, suction line strainer, service valves, reversible oil pumps for forced feed lubrication, a maximum operating speed of 1750 RPM. The system shall include cylinder unloaders on the semi-hermetic compressors. The unloaders shall be activated by solenoid valves which are controlled from the microprocessor control. In response to the return air temperature, the microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained. The stages shall be: 1) one compressor, partially loaded, 2) two compressors partially loaded, 3) one compressor partially loaded, one compressor fully loaded, 4) two compressors fully loaded. On a call for dehumidification, the microprocessor control shall insure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control. K. Refrigeration Circuits: Two; each with hot-gas mufflers, thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line solenoid valve, liquid-line filter-dryer, sight glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant. L. Refrigerant: R-407C unless otherwise indicated. M. Refrigerant Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face-circuit, direct-expansion coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins. 1. Coil assembly shall be mounted over stainless-steel drain pan complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2010 and having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. N. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube aluminum-fins coils arranged for two circuits, multiple direct-drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball bearings, and single-phase motors with internal overload protection and integral electric control panel and disconnect switch. Control capacity using three-way refrigerant bypass with receiver and isolation valve.
23 81 23 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. Winter Control: The winter control system for the air-cooled condenser shall allow startup and positive head pressure control with ambient temperatures as low as -30F (-34.4C). The package shall include the following components for each refrigeration circuit: insulated receiver, pressure relief valve, head pressure three-way control valve and rotalock valve for isolating the refrigerant charge. receiver shall be factoryinsulated and mounted ready for the field connection to the air-cooled condenser. The receiver shall have a heater and shall require a separate power supply of 120 volt, single phase. O. Heating Coil: 1. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed finned-tube electric elements arranged for minimum of three stages, with thermal safety switches, manual-reset overload protection, and branch-circuit over current protection. P. Crankcase Heaters - The compressors shall include crankcase heaters, powered from the indoor unit electric panel. Q. Filter Extended-Surface, Disposable, Panel type: Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame. 1. Thickness: 100 mm (4 inches). 2. MERV Rating: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2. V. Controls: 1. Integral Electrical Controls: Unit-mounted electrical enclosure with piano-hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer. a. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position. 2. Electronic-Control System: Solid state, with start button, stop button, temporary loss of power indicator, manual-reset circuit breakers, temperature control, humidity control, and monitor panel. W. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm on system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 81 23 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT malfunction occurs, system displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display fault when malfunction is cleared until system is reset. X. Malfunctions: 1. Power loss, loss of airflow, clogged air filter, high room temperature, and low room temperature. 2. High humidity. 3. Low humidity. 4. Smoke/fire, water under floor supply fan overload, compressor No. 1, overload compressor No. 1 low pressure. 5. Compressor No. 1, high pressure. 6. Compressor No. 2 overload. 7. Compressor No. 2, low pressure. 8. Compressor No. 2 high pressure. 9. Digital Display: a. Control power on. b. Humidifying. c. Dehumidifying d. Compressor No. 1 Operating. e. Compressor No. 2 operating. f. Heat operating. g. Economy cooling. 10. Push buttons shall stop and start process cooling system, silence audible alarm, test indicators, and display room's relative humidity.
2.02
SPECIAL TOOLS If any part of equipment furnished under these specifications requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment, setting, or maintenance and the tool is not readily available from the commercial tool market, furnish the necessary tools with equipment as a standard accessory
2.03
CORROSION CONTROL
A. Remote Outdoor Condenser Coils:
23 81 23 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. Epoxy Immersion Coating Electrically Deposited: The multi-stage corrosionresistant coating application comprises of cleaning (heated alkaline immersion bath) and reverse-osmosis immersion rinse prior to the start of the coating process. The coating thickness shall be maintained between 0.6-mil and 1.2-mil. Before the coils are subjected to high-temperature oven cure, they are treated to permeate immersion rinse and spray. Where the coils are subject to UV exposure, UV protection spray treatment comprising of UV-resistant urethane mastic topcoat shall be applied. Provide complete coating process traceability for each coil and minimum five years of limited warranty. The coating process shall be such that uniform coating thickness is maintained at the fin edges. The quality control shall be maintained by ensuring compliance to the applicable ASTM Standards for the following: a. Salt Spray Resistance (Minimum 6,000 Hours) b. Humidity Resistance (Minimum 1,000 Hours) c. Water Immersion (Minimum 260 Hours) d. Cross-Hatch Adhesion (Minimum 4B-5B Rating) e. Impact Resistance (Up to 160 Inch/Pound) B. Exposed Outdoor Cabinet 1. Casing Surfaces (Exterior and Interior): All exposed and accessible metal surfaces shall be protected with a water-reducible acrylic with stainless steel pigment sprayapplied over the manufacturers standard finish. The spray coating thickness shall be 2-4 mils and provide minimum salt-spray resistance of 1,000 hours (ASTM B117) AND 500 hours UV resistance (ASTM D4587).
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Handle and install refrigeration units and accessories in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Field Refrigerant Piping: As specified in specification Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING.
23 81 23 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Electrical System Connections and Equipment Ground: As specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.02
CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. D. Water and Drainage Connections:. Provide adequate connections for condensate drain. Unit is not equipped with condensate pump. Provide enough slope in condensate drain to allow for proper drainage. E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING. Provide shutoff valves and piping as detailed in drawings and manufacturers requirements.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 2. After installing computer-room air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide services of manufacturers technical representative for four hours to instruct FAA personnel in operation and maintenance of computer room air conditioning equipment.
23 81 23 - 9
3.05
STARTUP AND TESTING
A. The contractor shall provide a manufacturers representative to provide a start up service for each unit. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the Resident Engineer and site technicians. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice. B. Provide startup documentation detailing baseline values of unit.
3.06
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide services of manufacturers technical representative for four hours to instruct FAA personnel in operation and maintenance of units. B. Submit training plans and instructor qualifications to COTR.
END OF SECTION
23 81 23 - 10
SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY General: 1. The general electrical requirements in this section are applicable to both Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and non-GFE. Materials and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the contract documents. Materials furnished by the Contractor shall be new, the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials, and of the manufacturer's latest designs that comply with the specification requirements. If material and equipment requirements conflict, the order of precedence for selection shall be as follows: special contract provision, this specification, the contract drawings; and then in continuing order of precedence, military specifications, federal specifications, NFPA publications, IEEE standards, UL standards and NEMA standards. Wherever standards have been established by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., the material shall bear the UL label.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES: FAA Orders and Standards: 1.FAA-STD-1217f, Electrical Work, Interior 2.FAA-STD-1391B Installation and Splicing of Underground Cables 3.FAA-STD-019e, Lightning and Surge Protection, Grounding, Bonding and Shielding Requirements for Electronic Equipment National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 2.NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1.IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code 2.IEEE Std 100 Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms National Electrical Manufacures Association (NEMA) 1.NEMA C57.12.28 Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity 2.NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures 3.NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators 4.NEMA MG 10 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors
B.
C.
D.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 5.NEMA MG 11 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single-Phase Motors
1.03 A.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Provide the following electrical equipment and systems: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Equipment, wiring devices and electrical connections required for installation of electrical equipment. Raceways and wiring for power and controls. Grounding systems. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. Seismic bracing.
B.
Product Requirements: 1. Provide products which conform to and installation that complies with the requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).
C.
Spacing Requirements: 1. Electrical equipment sizes indicated on the drawings are generally based on specified manufacturer. Verify that the equipment proposed will fit in the space indicated on the drawings. Coordinate building dimensions with architectural and structural drawings. Equipment furnished and installed under other Sections of this Specification shall be coordinated with the requirements of this Section. Maintain clearances required by NFPA 70 around electrical equipment. Establish the exact location of electrical equipment based on the actual field verified dimensions of equipment furnished.
D.
Departure from Dimensions Shown: 1. Minor departures from exact dimensions shown in electrical plans may be permitted when required to avoid conflict or unnecessary difficulty in placement of a dimensioned item, provided all contract requirements are met. The Contractor shall promptly obtain written approval from the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative prior to undertaking any such departures and shall provide appropriate documentation of the departure.
1.04 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product specified. Samples: When the adequacy, quality and safety of a material will be better demonstrated and it will expedite approval, provide single samples of items proposed for use. Conform to the procedures specified. Submit samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification product for the project.
26 05 00 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Test Reports: 1. Operating Tests: a. An interim operating and performance test shall be performed for each major equipment item after installation is complete and before the item is placed in service. After systems have been completely installed and balanced, test each system for proper operation. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the COTR under design conditions to ensure proper sequence and operation throughout the range of operation. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of the systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Tests shall be scheduled and approved in writing by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative at least 21 calendar days prior to conducting tests. Contractor shall demonstrate, to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative's satisfaction, proper operation of control devices by simulating actual operating conditions. Devices tested shall include, but not be limited to, UPS, conductors, and system interlocks and alarms. Operating tests for GFE will be performed by the GFE vendors at the Government's expense. Contractor shall have a representative on site to witness all GFE tests. Submit a summary of the Electrical Test Report, noting deviations from requirements listed below: 1) 2) 3) D. Maximum plus or minus 5 percent variation between nominal system voltage and no load voltage. Variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents does not exceed the manufacturer's specified limits. Maximum plus or minus 10 percent variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents at Panel MDPC.
b.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide three copies of operating and maintenance instructions, equipment service manuals, catalog cuts and illustration as described in this section. The operations and maintenance (O&M) data shall be placed in suitable binders for use by maintenance personnel. The material shall include equipment model and serial numbers, performance characteristics, power and utility requirements and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedules. Final acceptance of this equipment is contingent upon submission of required documents to and approval by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative prior to the facility turnover.
1.05 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 70 and FAA-C-1217f for components and installation. In case of conflict between provisions of codes, laws and ordinances, the more stringent requirement shall apply. Material and Equipment Qualifications: Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal 26 05 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section. C. Listing and Labeling: 1. Provide products specified in the Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "listed and labeled" as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and labeling agency qualifications: NRTL as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7.
D.
Equipment Training (Non-GFE): 1. After final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative and other personnel, as directed by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative in details of operation and maintenance of special equipment, including control system as installed. Submit outline of proposed instruction course 21 days prior to start for approval by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
E.
Project Record Documents 1. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints of the contract documents for the purpose of recording the system and dimension changes of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract documents. The Contractor shall record changes for both GFE and Contractor provided equipment. Upon acceptance of the project, submit documents to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative, with verification of data accuracy. Mark the drawings with colored pencil. Prepare the drawings as the work progresses. Upon completion of work submit drawings clearly indicating the following: a. b. Locations of devices, conduits, equipment and other pertinent items. Indicate the depth of buried ducts and direct burial cable. Schematic and interconnection wiring diagrams of the completed power and control system incorporating the data derived from the equipment shop drawings and the cable and conduit schedule. The drawings shall be detailed to wire and terminal block numbers, conductor color coding, device designations locations and reflect identifications established at the site. Cable and conduit schedule for cables and conduits actually installed; include the type, size, origin, destination, and approximate length for each cable and conduit. Indicate for each cable the voltage rating, number of conductors, cable number, color coding and routing.
c.
26 05 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date: Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures. Safety precautions. The procedure in the event of equipment failure. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.
1.06 A.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Contractor provided equipment shall be protected from damage and stored in a dry location from the time of site delivery. Furnish and energize space heaters or provide desiccant recommended by the equipment manufacturer to prevent condensation. Conduct routine inspections of stored equipment to check equipment condition. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for electrical installations. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections. Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
1.07 A.
1.08 A.
26 05 00 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 6. B. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is applied to field-finished surfaces.
Interruption of Power: 1. Contractor is advised that the project site is located at a fully operational airport. Unscheduled power interruptions to any of the electrical distribution systems is not allowed. Work requiring a temporary or permanent de-energizing of the electrical service shall be scheduled and approved in writing by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative at least 14 calendar days in advance of performance of the work. Work may not commence until written authorization is received from the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SUPPORTING DEVICES Channel and angle supports, raceway supports, sleeves and fasteners shall be as specified in Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Provide electrical identification as specified in Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. Manufacturer's standard products to use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES: Provide new light fixtures in the locations shown on the drawings. TRACK LIGHTING: Provide products of Lightolier or approved equal. 1. 2. 3. Track: Provide Advent Lytespan 2 Circuit track, model 6101. Track shall be matte black. Provide variable angle connectors as necessary. Provide Lytespan Basic Monopoint, matte black, model 6190. Fixtures: Provide Dramalux Framing Projector, matte black, with compatible lamps, model 7644. Provide two (2) additional spare lamps.
2.02 A.
B.
2.03 A.
B.
LIGHTING CONTROL: Provide Lightolier Controls, Sunrise Preset Inductive and Electronic Low-Voltage Dimmers, or approved equal. Dimmers shall be designer style,
26 05 00 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT preset slide dimmers. Units shall be equipped with an off-status LED. Dimmers and faceplates shall be black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Comply with NECA 1. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the contract drawings. Where manufacturer's recommended installation methods conflict with the contract requirements, difference shall be resolved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. The installation shall be accomplished by skilled workers regularly engaged in this type of work. Where required by local regulation, the workers shall be properly licensed. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. INSTALLATION The rules, regulations, and reference documents indicated shall be considered as minimum requirements and shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing higher grades of materials and workmanship than are specified or when required by the contract drawings. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to provide proper working space, access, and space for removal of the equipment to suit intended application. Contract Drawings: 1. Where the drawings schematically indicate the work, diagrammatically or otherwise, furnish and install equipment, material and labor for a complete and proper installation. Ensure that electrical and communications work is coordinated and compatible with Architectural, Mechanical, Structural, and Civil work.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
Fastening: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware to the building structure in accordance with Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D.
Identification Devices:
26 05 00 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. E. Install identification devices where required in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
Wiring Methods: 1. All wiring shall consist of insulated copper conductors installed in metallic raceways, unless otherwise specified.
F.
Conductor Routing: 1. Panelboards, surge arresters, disconnect switches, etc., shall not be used as a raceway for conductor routing other than conductors that originate or terminate in these enclosures. Isolated ground conductors will be allowed to traverse these enclosures.
G.
Conductor Separation: 1. Power conductors shall be routed separately from all other conductor types. Route power conductors and other conductors in separate raceways, or by a metallic divider between the power conductors and the other conductors in the same raceway. 480Y/277V power cables shall be in separate raceways from 208Y/120V power cables.
H.
Neutral Conductor: 1. Shared/common neutrals shall not be permitted (i.e., each overcurrent device shall have its own separate neutral conductor). Neutral conductor sizes shall not be less than the respective feeder or phase conductor sizes.
I.
Ground Conductor: 1. Shared/common grounding conductors shall not be permitted (i.e., each overcurrent protective device shall have its own separate ground conductor). The equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the same conduit as its related branch and feeder conductors and shall be connected to the ground bus in the branch or distribution panelboard. Equipment ground conductor shall be the same size as the phase conductors were indicated for special equipment branch or feeder circuits that require parity sized ground conductors to comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
J.
Cable Terminations: 1. Provide terminations in accordance with this Section and manufacturer's requirements. All splices (including those in the building) must be approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
26 05 00 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3.03 A. DEMOLITION Protect existing electrical equipment and installations when performing new work. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. Remove demolished material from the project site. Remove, store, clean, re-install, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. Accessible Work: 1. C. Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.
B.
Abandoned Work: 1. Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. All wire not removed shall have the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative's written approval.
3.04 A.
CUTTING AND PATCHING Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. FIELD TESTING Perform the tests specified and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. Repair or replace equipment that does not meet test requirements and retest. Tests shall be scheduled and approved in writing by COTR at least 21 calendar days prior to conducting tests. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall furnish all test instruments, materials, and labor necessary to perform tests designated in Division 26 Sections. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. All instruments shall have been calibrated within a period of 1 year preceding testing. Calibrations shall be traceable to applicable industry recognized standards. Interim Operating and Performance Test: 1. Perform for each major equipment item after installation is complete and before the item is placed in service. After mechanical systems have been completely installed and balanced, test each system for proper operation. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative under design conditions to ensure proper sequence of operation throughout the range of operation. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of the systems. Special tests on
3.05 A.
B.
26 05 00 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT individual systems are specified under individual Sections. Provide 21 days written notice to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative for major tests. Contractor shall demonstrate, to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative's satisfaction, proper operation of control devices by simulating actual operating conditions. Devices tested shall include, but not be limited to, flow and pressure controls, temperature controls, and system interlocks and alarms. C. Operation and Maintenance of Equipment: 1. After final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative and other personnel as directed by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative in details of operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including control systems as installed.
D.
Electrical Test Report: 1. Complete the Electrical Test Report included as Attachment No. 1 of this division. Provide the requested information for each panelboard and its power supply conductors. Perform insulation resistance tests in compliance with Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables on wires including the neutral before connection to source and to loads. Perform the tests specified and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. Repair or replace equipment that does not meet test requirements and retest. Notify the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative in writing 21 days prior to conducting tests.
E.
Electrical Main Supply and Distribution Feeders: 1. All electrical main supply and distribution feeders originating from switchboards, distribution panelboards, panelboards, motor control centers, or transformers, and all electrical feeders to 3-phase electrical squirrel cage, induction motor, 1/2-horsepower (HP) and larger, shall be tested for open/short circuits. Submit the Electrical Test Report included as Attachment No.1.
F.
Other Tests: 1. All insulation resistance test, meggering, continuity tests, open and short circuiting testing that fail to meet the minimum standards as set forth in these electrical specifications shall have their feeder or branch circuit conductors (phase conductor, neutral and ground) removed and replaced. If after retesting, these feeder conductors fail to meet minimum requirements, the work shall be re-performed until such work and retesting passes the minimum design parameter requirements as set forth in these electrical specifications.
G.
Circuit Breaker Tests: 1. No 120 volt, single pole (1P) 15-100 amp, or any 277 volt, single pole (1P), 15-150 amp, molded case circuit breaker is required to be tested. All two pole (2P) and all 26 05 00 - 10
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT three pole (3P), molded case, insulated case and draw out power circuit breakers in both 208 volt and 480 volt ratings shall be tested for short circuit armature operation and for long term thermal overload protection operation to ascertain that they conform to within the manufacturer's recommended tolerances and design parameters. They shall be tested trip free of the handle operation, trip resetting and mechanical freedom of movement. The circuit breakers shall have factory recommended electrical insulation resistance and factory recommended electrical conductivity path resistance.
END OF SECTION
26 05 00 - 11
ATTACHMENT NO. 1 Electrical Test Report Project Name Sheet No. of Date Project No. _______________________________ Address _____________________________________ SERVICE TRANSFORMER SIZE NL SERVICE VOLTAGE FL SERVICE VOLTAGE PANEL OR SWBD SERVED FROM PANEL OR SWITCHBOARD LOCATION MANUFACTURER TYPE FEEDER OC PROTECTION FEEDER CONDUCTOR SIZE GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE MEASURED CONDITIONS NO LOAD FEEDER VOLTAGE OPERATING LOAD FEEDER VOLTAGE OPERATING LOAD FEEDER CURRENT CONDUCTOR INSUL RESISTANCE AB CONDUCTOR INSUL RESISTANCE BC CONDUCTOR INSUL RESISTANCE CA CONDUCTOR INSUL RESISTANCE TO GROUND NEUTRAL INSUL RES TO GR W/GR CONN REMOVED PHASE A B C PHASE A B C PHASE A B C
26 05 00 - 12
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This Section includes building wires and cables and associated splices, connectors, and terminations for wiring systems rated volts and less. REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Federal Specifications (FS) 1. 2. 3. C. FS QQ-W-343 Wire, Electrical, Copper (Uninsulated), with Notice 1 FS W-S-610 Splice Connectors FAA-STD-1217f,
1.02 A.
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
D.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 2. NEMA WC3 Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less
E.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. 2. 3. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors UL 486C Standard for Splicing Wire Connectors UL 486E Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors
F.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. 2. G. ASTM B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft ASTM D 1000 Standard Test Method for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes used for electrical and electronic applications.
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 1. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems
H.
National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA Standard of Installation
1.03 A. B.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
Test Reports: Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of testing standard. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Contractor shall test all material GFE or non-GFE as specified in Division 26 00 02 "Documentation, Testing, and Training Requirements" and 26 05 00 "Common Work Results".
1.04 A. B. C. D. E.
Components and Installation: Comply with NFPA 70, for components and installation. Listed and Labeled: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "Listed" and "Labeled" as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A NRTL as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7. Installer Qualifications: Cable splices shall be performed by experienced and qualified cable splices. The workman shall be licensed if required by the authority having jurisdiction. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinate layout and installation of cable with other installations. Revise locations and elevations form those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
1.05 A.
26 05 19 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
A. Specified Applications: UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in PART 3. B. UPS Power Conductors: Shall be 90C rated, THWN-2 or approved equal. 75C rated conductors will void the UL and CSA listing. Refer to the manufacturer's installation manual for further instructions regarding conductor size and type. C. Rubber Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC3. D. Thermoplastic Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC70, NEMA WC71,and NEMA WC74. E. Stranded Conductors: Solid conductor for 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than 10 AWG. Stranded conductors rating shall be tin coated, ASTM B 8, Class B. F. Wire and Conduit Sizes: All wire and conduit sizes are based on copper insulated conductors with 75 degrees C temperature rating and ambient temperature of 30 degrees C. G. Sizes: Minimum 12 AWG. Minimum 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits where circuit length (one way) exceeds 75 feet from source, and 10 AWG for 277 volt circuits where circuit length (one way) exceeds 150 feet from source. Communication systems wiring size shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Fire alarm and control systems wiring size shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stranded conductors may be used with wire compression connectors or a pressure washer type lug. Stranded conductors smaller than 10 AWG are allowed in applications where vibration and flexing may be encountered. Soft drawn, annealed copper (aluminum conductors are not acceptable). Power conductors shall be single conductor type. Control interconnection between equipment shall be jacketed type multiconductor. Instrumentation conductor shall be twisted pair, shielded, jacketed type. Conductors used for lighting and receptacle branch circuits shall be single conductor type.
H. Conductor Color Codes: Refer to Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems for conductors No. 4 AWG and larger, where factory color-coding is not available. Feeder conductors to panels and three phase circuits shall be factory color coded as follows: 1. 208/120 (240) Volt System: a. Phase A: Black
26 05 19 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT b. c. d. e. 2. Phase B: Red Phase C: Blue Neutral: White Ground: Green
480/277 Volt System: a. Phase A: Yellow b. Phase B: Brown c. Phase C: Orange d. Neutral: Gray e. Ground: Green Single-phase branch circuits shall be factory color coded as stated above, or identified in accordance with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. Control cables shall be IAW NEMA WC50 DC power cables shall be as follows: a. Plus: red color and identified with "+" symbol. b. Minus: black color and identified with "-" symbol. c. N: white (if used).
3.
4. 5.
I.
Un-insulated Conductors: Un-insulated conductors shall be copper and comply with FS QQ-W-343. CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
UL-listed factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type and class for applications and for service indicated. Select to comply with project's installation requirements and as specified in PART 3.
2.02 A.
B.
Connectors, Splice Sleeves, and Terminal Lugs: Wire and cable connectors, lugs, and sleeves shall be in compliance with UL 486A, and the following: 1. For splices of 10 AWG and smaller building wires in lighting circuits, use tin plated copper compression type connector caps with nonflammable, selfextinguishing insulation grip with temperature rating equal to that of conductor insulation. Use ring tongue compression type terminators with insulated barrel on all stranded conductors used in control wiring. Crimp type connectors are not permitted on solid conductors.
2. 3. C.
Insulating Tape: ASTM D 1000. As a minimum, rate equal to conductor insulation. Rubber tape shall be silicon rubber with silicon pressure sensitive adhesive.
26 05 19 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT D. Bundling Straps: Nylon straps with a locking hub or head on one end and a taper on the other. EXECUTION
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXAMINATION Examine raceway and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Verify that the duct or conduit is open, continuous, and clear of debris before installing cable. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLICATIONS
UPS Feeders: Type THWN-2 or approved equal, copper conductor 90 degrees C insulation, in raceway.
3.02 A. B. C. D. E.
Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor 75 degrees C insulation, in raceway. Indoor Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, 75 degrees C in raceway. Use this conductor for lighting and receptacle circuits in dry locations only. Exterior Branch Circuits: Type THWN, copper conductor, 75 degrees C insulation, in raceway. Communications System Wiring: Communications System wiring (to include telephone cable, fire alarm cable, security wiring, inter-communication wiring and public address/music system) shall be as specified under applicable sections and specified requirements of NFPA 70. Use copper wire or fiber optics cable only. Aluminum wire is not permitted. INSTALLATION
Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA. Pull conductors into raceway simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.
3.03 A.
1. 2. 3.
Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation, and must be non-flammable. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basketweave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. Bend to radii not less than the minimum bending recommended by manufacturer or 12 times the outer diameter of cable. Do not exceed the pulling tension recommended by manufacturer.
26 05 19 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. Cable shall be installed in a manner to prevent harmful stretching of the conductor, injury to the insulation or damage to the outer protective covering. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. The ends of cables shall be sealed with moisture-seal tape before pulling, and it shall be left sealed until connections are made. No splices shall be allowed on critical power circuits and feeders. Conductor Splices: Keep to a minimum. Splices shall be made only at outlets, junction boxes, or accessible raceways. Wire nuts may only be used to splice conductors sized No. 10 AWG and smaller. Compression connectors shall be used to splice conductors No. 8 AWG and larger. All splices, including those made with insulated wire nuts, shall be insulated with electrical tape or heat-shrink tubing to a level equal to that of the factory insulated conductors. Splicing of ungrounded conductors in panelboards is not permitted. Splices shall be made with solderless connectors conforming to UL 486A, UL 486C, UL 486E and FS W-S-610. Install splices and insulating tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material. Splice methods and material shall be of a type recommended by the manufacturer of the splicing material for the particular type of cable being spliced and shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative prior to installation. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 6 inches of slack conductor at each outlets. Connecting Outlets and Components: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torquetightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Critical Circuits: Conductors for critical circuits, emergency lighting, security systems, and fire alarm systems shall be kept completely independent from any other system as well as each other.
C. D. E. F. G. H.
I. J. K. L. M.
N. O.
P.
26 05 19 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT Q. Cable/Conductor Installation: Cables/Conductors sized 250 kCMIL and greater shall be installed with the sue of a hydraulic cable bender. Cable supports shall be required for stress relief. A splice shall not be pulled into a duct or conduit under any circumstance. Neutral and Ground: Separate neutral and ground wires shall be provided for each over current protection device. Each branch circuit shall have its own neutral and ground conductor. Common neutral or ground is not acceptable. Neutral conductors shall extend from the neutral bus where the phase conductors originate. Install conductors only after the raceway system is complete. Electrical Identification: Install electrical identification devices specified in Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems at terminations, immediately after installing wires and cables. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing, General:
R.
S.
3.04 A.
1.
2. 3. 4. B.
Cables shall be tested prior to installation and again upon completion of the installation. Testing shall be accomplished before connection is made. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Upon installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test state in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Test wire and cable for continuity or circuitry, and also for short circuits.
Insulation Resistance Tests: Feeder and branch circuit insulation tests shall be performed after installation, but before connection to equipment. 1. Conductors shall test free from short circuits and grounds, and have a minimum phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance of 30 mega-ohms when measured with a 500-volt DC insulation resistance. The Contractor shall submit a letter type test report to the COTR prior to final inspection of the work. The report shall list the tests performed and results obtained. Apply the test voltage for at least one minute after motor reading his stabilized. See attachment No. 2 of this division for example test report.
2. 3. C.
Malfunctioning Products: Correct malfunction products at site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
26 05 19 - 7
ATTACHMENT NO. 2 Megger Test Report: 600 V CABLE INSULATION AND CONTINUITY TEST (power/control wire & cable)
Project Name _______________ Date _______________ Sheet No. _____ of ____ Project No. _____________________ Address __________________________________ NOTE: 500 VOLT MEGOHMETER, MEGGER ALL PHASES, RECORD MINIMUM READING
Panel No. Ckt. No. Fedder No. VOLTS A-B A-C B-C A-N* B-N* C-N* A-G B-G C-G N*-G
Approved:
N* - Perform test where neutral is available
END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - 8
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. It includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of this Specification. Grounding requirements for FAA-occupied spaces often exceed NFPA 70 criteria. Install grounding systems in accordance with this Section and as indicated on the drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. FAA Specifications and Standards 1. 2. 3. 4. FAA-STD-19eLightning and Surge Protection, Grounding, Bonding and Shielding Requirements: Boise ATCT/Base Building FAA-STD-020a Transient Protection, Grounding Bonding and Sheilding for Electronic Equipment 6950.19b Practices and Procedures for Lightning Protection, Grounding, Bonding and Shielding Implementation 6950.20a Fundamental Considerations of Lightning Protection, Grounding, Bonding and Shielding
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 1. 2. 3. IEEE 1100 Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. 2. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. 2. 3. ASTM B 3 ASTM B 33 ASTM B 8 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 4. 29 CFR 1910.7 Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)
1.03 A. B.
SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: Product Data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Grounding Rods Connectors and Connection Materials Grounding Fittings Qualifications Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of complete projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C.
Test Reports: 1. Field Tests and Observation Reports: Certified by the testing organization and indicating and interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements.
26 05 26 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 1.04 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Contractor shall test all material GFE or non-GFE as specified in Division 26 00 02 "Documentation, Testing, and Training Requirements" and 26 05 00 "Common Work Results". Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 1. Listing and Labeling Agency: Qualifications as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7.
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS
WIRING AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS Comply with Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. Conform to NFPA 70, except as otherwise indicated for conductor properties, including stranding. Material: Copper. Use only copper wire for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. Size: Comply with FAA-STD-19e. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. Insulated conductors larger than #6AWG with black color insulation shall be allowed to be reidentified with green tape. 1. The equipment grounding conductor shall be routed in the same raceway as its related phase and neutral conductors. Cord-connected equipment requiring an equipment ground shall include the equipment grounding conductor as an integral part of the power cord. Where power is supplied to electronic equipment through a cable and connector, the connector shall contain a pin to continue the equipment grounding conductor to the equipment chassis. Conduit or cable shields shall not be used as the equipment grounding conductor. Grounding terminals in all receptacles on multioutlet assemblies shall be hardwired to an equipment grounding conductor. Strips that depend upon serrated or toothed fingers for grounding shall not be used. All flexible metal conduits shall be provided with an external bonding jumper in addition to the internal equipment grounding conductor. Therefore, liquid tight flexible metal conduit must be used where any flexible metal conduit is required.
B.
C. D.
2.
3.
26 05 26 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT The bonding jumper shall be a 6 AWG green-insulated stranded copper conductor or the largest jumper the conduit grounding bushing permits. The bonding jumper shall terminate on fittings listed for grounding at each end of the liquid tight flexible metal conduit. 4. E. F. G. A separate equipment grounding conductor shall be provided for each overcurrent device and as required by the NEC.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation and yellow and red bands. Single Point Grounding Conductors: Insulated, color shall be green with a bright yellow tracer. Electronic Multipoint Ground System: Insulated; color shall be green with bright orange tracer. Where cables are concealed and not color coded, any exposed portion of the cable and each end of the cable for a minimum of 2 feet shall be color coded by green tape overlaid with bright orange tape to form the tracer. Where routed through raceways or wireways, or under raised floors, the color coding shall be such that by removing or opening any cover, color coding shall be visible. Where conductors are routed through cable trays, color coding for a minimum length of 4 inches shall be accomplished at intervals not exceeding 3 feet between codings. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following: 1. 2. 3. Solid conductors: ASTM B 3. Assembly of stranded conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned conductors: ASTM B 33.
H. I. J.
2.02 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper. Size as indicated on drawings. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Where electrical continuity across the shock mounts is necessary, bonding jumpers shall be installed across each shock mount. Jumpers of this application should have a maximum thickness of 0.025-inch, so that the damping efficiency of the mount is not impaired. In severe shock and vibration environments, solid straps may be corrugated, or flexible wire braid may be used. Braids are to be terminated with copper ferrules. Raceway Bonding Jumpers: Copper, minimum size #6 AWG unless otherwise noted.
C.
26 05 26 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 2.03 A. CONNECTOR PRODUCTS Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. GROUNDING ELECTRODES Grounding Rods: Grounding rods shall be copper or copper-clad steel, a minimum of 10 feet in length and 3/4-inch in diameter. Rod cladding shall not be less than 1/100inch thick. Sectionalized type or exothermic butt welded rods shall be used when deeper earth penetration is required. Ground rods shall bear the manufacturer's name,
trademark, and catalog number.
2.04 A.
2.05 A.
ELECTRONIC MULTIPOINT GROUND SYSTEM (MPG) The electronic multipoint ground system is a network which provides multiple low impedance paths between various non-current carrying metal objects in facility, electronic equipment (chassis), and the earth electrode system. This system is intended to minimize the effects of spurious currents that may be present in the ground system due to equipment operation or malfunction, or from lightning discharges. The multipoint ground system shall not be used in lieu of the safety ground required by NFPA 70. The multipoint ground system is not to be used as a signal return path. Multipoint Ground Plates and Buses: The location of the ground plate shall be chosen to facilitate the interconnection of all equipment enclosures, consoles, cabinets, racks, cases, etc., within a particular area. The distance from any ground plate to the specific individual equipment enclosure, console, rack, etc., being bonded to the MPG system shall never exceed three feet. Where more than one ground plate is necessary, they shall be installed at various locations within the facility to facilitate interconnection. Ground buses may be used when distributed grounding is desired or is more convenient with a long row of equipment cabinets considering the requirement to be within three feet of the enclosure. Ground plates shall be copper and at least 12 inches long, 6 inches wide and inch thick. Ground buses shall be copper. Ground bus width and thickness shall be selected from Table-I, and shall be as long as required. Ground plates and buses shall be identified with a permanently attached plastic or metal label that is green with distinguishing bright orange slashes. The label shall bear the caption ELECTRONIC MULTIPOINT GROUND SYSTEM in black 3/8-inch (10 mm) high letters. Ground Conductors Earth electrode System to Plates: Conductors in the MPG system shall be insulated and sized in accordance with Table-IX of FAA STD-019e, based on the distance between the Earth Electrode System and the furthest plate along any single path - but in no case smaller than 4/0 AWG. Conductors shall be color-coded green with an orange tracer or shall be clearly marked for four inches at each end and wherever exposed with green tape and an orange tracer. Additionally, when routed in cable trays,
B.
C.
26 05 26 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT conductors shall be color-coded every three feet. Where MPG conductors are routed through cable trays, they shall be separated from the other conductors as far as possible. 2.06 A. POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING The facility electrical grounding shall comply with NFPA 70. The electronic ground systems shall not replace or be used in lieu of the power distribution system grounding conductors.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION Equipment Grounding Conductors: All metallic non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment shall be grounded with equipment grounding conductors whether or not shown on the drawings. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. When these conductors are not sized nor shown on the contract drawings, size them in accordance with FAA-STD-19e. In no case, however, shall these conductors be smaller than No. 12 AWG. Install green, equipment grounding conductor with all feeder and branch circuit conductors. 1. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and above, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
B. C.
Separately Derived Systems: Ground according to NFPA 70. Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors, including grounding-conductor conduits, to lightning protection down conductors or lightning protection grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA 780, FAA-STD-019e. Grounding Bushing: Provide a grounding bushing for rigid steel conduit entering or leaving a facility building. Ground both ends of the rigid conduit from the grounding bushings to the counterpoise using a #2 AWG minimum bare copper cable, or as indicated on the drawings. Provide for power cable and spare conduit. Conduit fittings and joints shall be electrically continuous with bonding resistance of 1 milliohms or less between joined parts. Conduit or Cable Shields: Conduit or cable shields shall not be used as the equipment grounding conductor. Metallic Non-current Carrying Parts: All metallic non-current carrying parts of electrical and mechanical equipment throughout the facility shall be bonded by welding with a separate equipment grounding conductor, #4 AWG (with green insulation) or
D.
E. F.
26 05 26 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT larger and connected to the multipoint ground system. All metallic non-current carrying parts of electrical and mechanical equipment shall be grounded with equipment grounding conductors whether or not shown on the drawings. 3.02 A. INSTALLATION The grounding requirements exceed those of NFPA 70. Grounding system shall be as indicated on the contract drawings and as specified herein. Reference FAA-STD-019e and IEEE 1100 when installing equipment. In no case shall NFPA 70 be violated. Ground Rods: Install ground rods as follows: 1. Grounding rods shall be as widely spaced as practical, and in no case shall be spaced less than 1 rod length apart. Nominal spacing between rods shall be between 2 and 3 times rod length. Tops of vertically-driven ground rods shall be not less than 12 inches below grade level. Ground rods shall be located 2 to 6 feet outside the foundation or exterior footing of the structure. On buildings with overhangs, ground rods may be located further out.
B.
2. 3.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: 1. The grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or insulated copper, and shall be sized as shown in the contract documents. When not indicated in the contract documents, the conductor shall be copper and sized according to NFPA 70, except that the conductor shall not be smaller than #2 AWG. Where the grounding electrode conductor is routed through a metal raceway, the raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded to the conductor at each end. The grounding electrode conductor shall be bonded to the earth electrode system with an exothermic-welded joint. For a separately derived system such as an isolation transformer, the grounding electrode conductor shall be connected in accordance with other parts of this Section. This conductor shall terminate by exothermic welding to the closest effectively grounded building steel or as indicated on the drawings.
D.
Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact or damage. Equipment Enclosure Grounding: 1. Ground lugs shall be mounted on clean, bare metal surfaces that are free of paint, rust, etc. All ground lugs shall be of a noncorrosive material suitable for use as a grounding connection, and must be compatible with the type of metal being grounded. Bare wire, wrapped around connecting screws or mounting bolts and screws is not acceptable as a grounding connection. 26 05 26 - 7
E.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT F. Raceway Grounding: 1. Surface metal raceways, wireways, or cable rack systems shall be installed in a manner that ensures electrical continuity, or short bare copper bonding jumpers shall be installed between adjacent raceway sections to ensure proper bonding. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum size for these bonding jumpers shall be #6 AWG.
G.
Interior Metal Piping and Air Ducts: Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps. Fault Protection: Prevent equipment parts subject to human contact during operation and maintenance from being electrically energized when powering faults or components fail. Ground parts with a low impedance path to the chassis or cabinets in which they are mounted. CONNECTIONS Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert materials to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel, for underground connections, and where indicated on drawings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Terminations: Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders with pressure-type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at nonmetallic or nonconductive housings, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors. Raceway Grounding: Surface metal raceways, wireways, or cable rack systems shall be installed in a manner that ensures electrical continuity. Insulated copper bonding jumpers shall be installed between adjacent raceway sections to ensure proper bonding. Uninsulated conductors shall not be used. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum size for these bonding jumpers shall be #6 AWG. All metallic raceway penetrations into a facility structure shall be bonded to the earth electrode system.
H.
3.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
26 05 26 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT E. Tightening of Connectors: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminators, including screws and bolts, in accordance with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Mechanical connections using a Burndy "Hyground Connector", Thomas and Betts Compression Connector or FAA approved equivalent equipment when operated at the manufacturer's recommended pressure to develop a minimum force of 12 tons is acceptable as approved pressure connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on ground conductor. Hydraulically crimped connectors are not acceptable in the lightning protection system. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Contractor shall test all material GFE or non-GFE as specified in Division 26 00 02 "Documentation, Testing, and Training Requirements" and 26 05 00 "Common Work Results". 1. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a test using a ground test null balance megger at system ground well, where a 10 ohm measurement is required. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method in accordance with IEEE 81. a. b. Earth electrode system ground shall not exceed 10 ohms. All grounds, bonds, and continuity tests that fail to meet the minimum standards and resistivity levels as set forth in these electrical specifications shall have their materials removed and replaced and shall have all workmanship redone. If after retesting they fail to meet minimum requirements, the work shall be redone until such work and retesting passes the minimum design parameter requirements. All sections of joined conduit, cable tray, or structural steel columns and beams shall have the first 10 consecutive connections of each system tested for continuity/grounding/bonding. If they test within acceptable limits, then test every 10th consecutive connection thereafter. If any test point is higher than specified in these electrical sections then test the next 10 consecutive connections and/or as many points as required to get a satisfactory reading below the specified rating. If more than 10 test points of each system are above the specified values, then all continuity/grounding/bonding points in that system shall be tested.
F.
3.04 A.
c.
26 05 26 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT B. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization of ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this Section. Reestablish original grades, except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical. Maintain restored surfaces.
3.05 A.
END OF SECTION
26 05 26 - 10
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This Section includes secure sport from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings. REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. 2. C. ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
1.02 A.
B.
D. 1.03 A. 1.04 A.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) SUBMITTALS Product data for each type of product specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third-party certification follow-up services.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. COATINGS Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Product for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized. MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1. 2. 3. C. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Not Allowed.
2.02 A. B.
U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in conduits subject to exposure to water and/or oil penetration at conduit joints. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit installation. Construct body of malleable iron casting with hot-dipped galvanized finish. Support systems shall be capable of carrying the weight of the box and its contents. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat end lock washers. Provide steel channel supports with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches on center, in at least one surface. Fittings and accessories to mate and match with channels and to be form same manufacturer. FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES General 1. Shop or Field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from Uchannel components.
D.
E.
2.03 A.
B.
Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angels, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. 26 05 29 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT C. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with welded spiral seams or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. b. c. d. D. 3-inch and smaller: 20-gage 4-inch to 6-inch: 16 gage over 6-inch: 14 gage Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
Supplementary Structural Supports: ASTM A 36 steel shapes. 1. 2. Supports and supporting devices shall be designed and installed to withstand the local code equivalent of a minimum UBC Seismic Zone 2A force. Provide the installation of supplementary structural supports required for attachment of hangers and other devices supporting electrical equipment and conduits. Members welded to main structural members shall be equal to the specification for the main structural member. Size support members for their actual loads and safety factors without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration.
3. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NFPA 70. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. Raceway Supports: Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements: 1. 2. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry design load plus 25 percent for future use, multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 pounds, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 pounds safety allowance in the strength of each support. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceway. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.
B.
3.
4.
26 05 29 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. Space supports for raceway in accordance with Table I of this Section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NFPA 70. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1-foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or thread-less box connectors. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors are carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panel boards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. Open Overhead Spaces: In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches form the box. Cast metal boxes having thread-less connectors and sheet-metal boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panel boards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, lighting fixtures, and control components in accordance with the following: 1. Fasten by means of wood screws, nails, screw-type nails, carriage bolts, or lag screws of equal holding strength on wood; toggle bolts on hollow masonry units concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry; and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4-inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Patch holes that are not used with like and kind materials.
D.
E.
2.
26 05 29 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACMENT 3. 4. Coordinate any cutting or boring of structural beams with Structural Engineer prior to any work being done. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. Coordinate with structural engineer on expansion joints used to support raceway.
5. F.
Tests: Provide all calibrated jacks, jigs, and fixtures, indicate scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the COTR's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load for fastener. If fastening fails test, revise all similar fastener installations and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. Test pullout resistance of one of each type, size, and anchorage material for expansion anchors and toggle bolts.
26 05 29 - 5
TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS HORIZONTAL RUNS Raceway No. of Size Conduits (Inches) In Run 1/2,3/4 1 or 2 1/2,3/4 1 or 2 RMC & IMC (1) 5 7
1/2,3/4 3 or more 1/2 13 or more 1 & larger 1 & larger
1 & larger Any VERTICAL RUNS 1/2, 3/4 1, 1-1/4 1-1/2 and larger Any NOTES: (1) (2)
Location Flat ceiling or wall. Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction. Any location. Any location. 1 or 2 flat ceiling or wall 1 or 2 where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction 3 or more any location Concealed
EMT (1) 5 7
7 6 10
7 6 10
10 10
10 10
Exposed Exposed Exposed Concealed
7 8 10 10
7 8 10 10
Maximum spacing of supports (feet). Maximum spacing for IMC above apply to straight runs only. Otherwise, the maximums for EMT apply. Abbreviations: EMT: Electrical metallic tubing IMC: Intermediate metallic conduit RMC: Rigid metallic conduit
END OF SECTION
26 05 29 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT
26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. FAA Standards (FAA) 1. 2. C. FAA 1217f Electrical Work, Interior FAA STD 019E Lightning Protection, Grounding, Bonding and Shielding Requirements for Facilities
B.
Federal Specifications (FS) 1. WW-C-566 Conduit, Metal flexible
D.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. 2. 3. ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated ANSI C80.6 Intermediate Metal Conduit Zinc-Coated
E.
F.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. NECA Standard of Installation
G.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 2. 3. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA FB1 Fitting, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies, and Cable Assemblies NEMA ICS-6 Industrial Control System Enclosure
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 4. 5. H. NEMA OS1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 29 CFR 1910.7 Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. UL 1 UL 1242 UL 360 UL 486A UL 5 UL 50 UL 514A UL 514B UL 6 UL 797 UL 870 Flexible Metal Conduit Intermediate Metal Conduits Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Metallic Outlet Boxes Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes Rigid Metal Conduit Electric Metallic Tubing Wireways, Auxiliary Gutter, and Associated Fittings
I.
J.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SSPC PS-10.01 Hot-Applied Coal Tar Enamel Painting System
1.02 A. 1.03 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. RACEWAY COMPONENTS Raceways include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rigid metal conduit (RMC). Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Liquidtight flexible conduit (LFMC). Wireway. Nonmetallic tubing and conduit.
1.04 A.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following: 1. Device boxes. 26 05 33 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.05 A. Outlet boxes. Pull and junction boxes. Conduit bodies. Cable access boxes. Cabinets and hinged cover enclosures.
SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Nonstandard boxes, enclosures and cabinets: Include layout drawings showing components, wiring, supports, and seismic bracing. Surface raceway Wireway and fittings Floor boxes Hinged cover enclosures and cabinets Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.06 A. B. C. D.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with the latest edition of NFPA 70 for components and installation. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 376. Comply with NECA. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "Listed and Labeled" as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A NRTL as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7. Layout Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance and access. All outdoor boxes shall be rated minimum NEMA 4X.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL Enclosures shall conform to NEMA standards. All materials procured under this Section shall be in accordance with FAA 1217f and FAA STD 019E. METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) 26 05 33 - 3
2.02 A.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT B. C. D. E. ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN1. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings: UL 797 and ANSI C80.3 with compression-type fittings. Screw-type fittings are not acceptable. Use for lighting, building power, fire alarm, environmental and communication circuits in concealed areas where not subject to physical damage, such as suspended ceilings, furred walls and raised floors. Connectors shall have insulated-throat, smooth bell shaped end or a bushing. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Zinc-coated steel; UL 1 and WW-C-566. Conduit and fittings shall be type listed for grounding. Provide FMC in minimum 24 inches or 10 diameter lengths for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration and movement. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket; UL 360. Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit: Shall not be used. Fittings: NEMA FB1 and UL 514B, compatible with conduit and of the threaded type. Set screw fittings are not allowed. Conduit expansion and deflection fittings shall be watertight. Fabricate from material compatible with conduit to be used. Expansion and deflection fittings shall be equipped with bonding jumper cable to provide electrical continuity. Lock-nut and bushings inside boxes or enclosures shall be grounding type. Underground Fittings: Shall be protected by field wrapping, 0.01-inch thick pipe wrapping plastic tape applied with 50 percent overlap. WIREWAYS Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated. Fittings and Accessories: UL 870. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with wireway as required for complete system. Provide ground bushings on all conduit terminations to wireways and galvanized rigid steel as indicated in PART 3 of this Section. Select features where not otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, unless noted otherwise. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. Provide NEMA rating appropriate for use intended.
F.
G. H. I.
J.
2.03 A. B.
C. D.
26 05 33 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2.04 A. B. C. D. E. F. OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES Boxes shall not contain concentric knockouts. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS1 and UL 514A. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB1, type FD, cast ferro-alloy box with gasketed cover. Exposed Outlet Boxes: UL 514A steel, malleable iron or cast iron boxes with threaded conduit entry for surface-mounting in areas having exposed conduit systems. Flush Outlet Boxes: UL 514A hot-dip galvanized steel, square or rectangular, 2 1/8 inches deep by 4 inches square, with extension ring where necessary. Boxes for Lighting Fixtures: Flush-mounted or in concealed areas to be octagonal, 4 inches by 2 1/8 inches deep, galvanized steel, with fixture stud supports and attachments to properly support ceiling and bracket type lighting fixtures. Surfacemounted to be malleable or cast iron boxes with threaded conduit hub. Fittings: UL 514B. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS1 and UL 514A. Cast Metal Boxes: Threaded-hub type conforming to UL 514A and UL 514B. Galvanized steel conforming to UL 514A and UL 514B. CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Hinged Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Cabinets: NEMA 250, type 1 code gauge galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. Cabinets shall be constructed with interior dimensions not less than those indicated on the drawings. Provide 5/8-inch plywood backboard unless otherwise indicated. Key latch to match panelboards. Provide two keys with each cabinet unless otherwise notified. Safety: UL 50. Control Enclosures: NNEMA ICS-6. Telephone and Signal Cabinets: Construct in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 312. 26 05 33 - 5
G. 2.05 A. B.
2.06 A. B.
C. D. E.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Examine raceways prior to installation. No crushed or deformed raceways shall be installed. WIRING METHODS Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Exposed: RMC. Concealed: RMC. Underground, Single Run: Zinc coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings. Underground, Grouped: Zinc-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): LFMC. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 4X. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods: a. b. c. d. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): LFMC. Damp or Wet Locations: RMC. Exposed: RMC or IMC. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in the electrical/mechanical room to a height of 8 feet above finished floor. Concealed: EMT, IMC, RMC (EMT shall only be used for lighting, receptacles, communications, fire alarm, security and environmental conditions in concealed locations indoors). Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 1, except in damp or wet locations use NEMA Type 4, stainless steel.
3.02 A.
e. 8.
Conduit Use: Install RMC or IMC for all branch circuit panelboard feeders, distribution panel board feeders, transformer feeders, motor control center feeders and distribution switchboard feeders. Install EMT for communication, lighting and power branch circuits. USE RMC for all exposed conduit systems within electrical and mechanical equipment rooms and electrical closets from floor level to a height of 8 feet above finished floor. Conduit for communications, lighting and power branch circuits may be transitioned to EMT above 8 feet above finished floor.
26 05 33 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3.03 A. INSTALLATION Products shall be installed in accordance with FAA-C-1217f and FAA-STD-019e. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum size raceway shall be 3/4-inch, unless otherwise noted. Conduit for telephone and signal systems shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 3/4-inch conduit may be used for lengths not exceeding 100 feet. 1-inch conduit shall be used for lengths exceeding 100 feet. No run shall contain more than four 90 degree bends, or the equivalent. Provide pull and junction boxes as required to meet the above criteria.
Conduit/Raceway Installation: Conceal conduit including EMT, unless otherwise indicted, within finished walls, ceilings and floors. Raceways shall not be attached to the ceiling suspension system. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by roof decks. Do not anchor or strap raceways to wall furring channels or to other raceways. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Do not install raceways near uninsulated high temperature services without prior approval of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 1. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. Conduits and raceways shall run parallel or perpendicular to building structural members. Install conduit to drain moisture to nearest outlet or pull box. Inside radii of bends in conduits shall not be less than 6 times the nominal diameter. No run shall contain more than four 90 degree bends, or the equivalent between conduit terminations. Signal raceway 2 inches and smaller shall have no run of 1/2-inch or 3/4-inch exceed 50 feet; or 100 feet for 1-inch or larger and a maximum of two 90 degree bends, or the equivalent. Install pull boxes or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Provide conduit bodies, pull and junction boxes required to meet the bends criteria. Provide a pull box for critical power circuits for three 90 degree bends. Threaded conduit bodies shall be used for all critical power circuits. Install a pull wire in all empty tubing and conduit systems. Pull wire shall be No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or plastic with a minimum 200 pound tensile strength. Provide 10 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Raceways shall be fished and swabbed before conductors are pulled.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
9. C.
Support of Raceways: Support raceways and boxes as specified in Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. Boxes for fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be supported independently of the ceiling supports. Boxes shall not be supported from sheet metal roof decks.
26 05 33 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT D. Raceway Protection: Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely freed of obstructions or shall be replaced. Clean each conduit run before pulling in conductors. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Bends and Offsets: Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. IMC bends shall be fabricated with tooling specifically designed for bending IMC. Signal conduit that is 1-inch and larger shall have a minimum inside radii 12 times the nominal conduit diameter. No run shall contain more than four 90 degree bens or the equivalent. Provide pull and junction boxes required to meet the bends criteria. For critical power conduits, only conduit bodies are allowed. Raceway Fittings: Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. EMT conduit shall employee compression type fittings. For RMC and IMC conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, except as otherwise indicated. Screw type fittings shall not be used. Concealed Raceways: Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated. Raceways in Damp, Concealed or Underground Locations: Raceways or sections of raceways which pass through to damp, concealed, or underground locations shall be of a type allowed for such locations by NFPA 70 and shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the damp, concealed, or underground area. Floor and Wall Penetrations: Penetrations through walls or floors shall be sealed to prevent moisture and rodent entry and to deter air transfer. Seal penetrations of walls, which separate individually temperature or humidity controlled areas to prevent air circulation. Seal conduit penetrations between conditioned and unconditioned spaces with an approved removable material. Installation at Structural Members: Install raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces of structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where they can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. Joining of Raceway Fittings: Join raceway fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding locknuts and bushings at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. Use insulating bushings for all conduits to protect conductors. Provide expansion fittings
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
26 05 33 - 8
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT for all raceways passing through the building expansion joints and for conduit runs longer than 300 feet. L. Terminating: Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Pull Wires: Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 pound tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Stub-Up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded plugs flush with floor. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Provide #6 AWG stranded insulated copper bonding jumper terminated on an approved grounding fitting at each end of the flex metal conduit. Metal Conduits: Metal conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous between outlets, junction boxes and pull boxes, panels, cabinets and similar equipment. Conduits shall enter and be secured to enclosures so that each system is electrically continuous throughout. Enclosures and Cabinets: Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. Grounding Connections: Provide grounding connections for raceways, boxes, and components. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Provide ground bushings for all feeder conduits at switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, pull boxes and all other termination points. Where knockouts are used, provide double locknuts, one on each side with a grounding bushing or grounding locknut used on the inside (use grounding bushings on conduit 1-inch and larger). Field-Cut Conduit: Where conduit has to be cut in the field, it shall be cut square. The cut ends of the field-cut conduit shall be reamed to remove burs and sharp edges.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q. R.
S.
26 05 33 - 9
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT T. Field-Threaded Conduit: Where threads have to be cut on conduit, the threads shall have the same effective length and shall have the same thread dimensions and taper as specified for factory-cut threads on conduit. Boxes: Shall be provided in the wiring or raceway system for pulling wires, making connections and mounting devices or fixtures. Each box shall have the volume required by NFPA 70 for the number and size of conductors in the box. Label all junction/pull boxes with panelboard name and circuit number with permanent marker. Outlet Boxes: Each outlet box shall have a machine screw which fits into a tapped hole in the box for the ground connection. Attach boxes to ceilings which are not suspended in at least two places. Distribute lighting fixture load over the ceiling boxes. Mounting Light Fixtures: Boxes for mounting fixtures shall not be less than 4 inches square. Concealed Wiring: Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with extension rings or plaster covers. The front edge of the box shall be flush or recessed not more than 1/4-inch from the finished wall surface (whether the finished surface is drywall, or drywall and a sound absorbing material). Boxes in Masonry Block or Tile Walls: Shall be square-cornered title-type, or standard boxes shall have square-cornered tile-type covers. Wet Locations: Cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with exterior surfaces shall be gasketed.
U.
V.
W. X.
Y. Z.
AA. Box Openings: Provide only the openings necessary to accommodate the conduits at the individual location. When this is not practical, plug unused openings. BB. Junction, Transition, and Pull Boxes: Install junction, transition, and pull boxes so that covers are not readily accessible. Boxes in concealed areas of ceiling or wall shall be accessible through removable panels. Locate pull boxes to permit easy pulling of wire or cables. Securely attach boxes to structural and framing members using compatible fasteners of adequate size. Bolt wall-mounted boxes to steel profiles fastened to the wall. CC. Grounding: Provide each box with a green machine screw. Screw into tapped hole in the box for ground wire or lug connection. DD. RMC or IMC Below Slab on Grade or Underground: The conduit shall conform to SSPC PS-10.01 or shall be field wrapped with 0.01-inch thick pipe wrapping plastic tape applied with 50 percent overlay. EE. EMT Entering Enclosure Without Threaded Hubs: Provide a connector with threads and cast or machined locknut. The connector body and locknut shall be installed so that firm contact is made on each side of the enclosure.
26 05 33 - 10
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3.04 A. PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at substantial completion. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer. Cap stubbed up raceways, including raceways in cabinets, immediately upon installation. The use of paper or rag wads is not acceptable. Galvanic Corrosion Protection: Avoid dissimilar metals in contact anywhere in conduit runs. Where contact cannot be avoided at conduit terminations, treat the connection with joint compound that eliminates galvanic corrosion. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, such as at aluminum cable tray or enclosures and steel supports, separate contact surfaces by using gaskets, non absorptive tape or coating to prevent galvanic corrosion. CLEANING Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
3.05 A.
END OF SECTION
26 05 33 - 11
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1. This Section included identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components, including but not limited to buried electrical line warnings; identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors; operational instruction signs; warning and caution signs; and equipment labels and signs.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. FAA Specifications and Standards 1. FAA 1217f, Electrical Work, Interior.
B.
C.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
D.
IEEE 1. C2-2007, National Electrical Safety Code
1.03 A. B. C.
SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Schedule of Identification Nomenclature: Provide a schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT D. Labels and Signs: Samples for each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for identification materials. QUALITY ASSURANCE Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. Comply with requirements of ANSI A13.1 with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is applied to field-finished surfaces. Coordinate installing electrical identifying devices and markings prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar finishes that conceal such items. 1. Provide Identification Labels on: a. UPS Equipment b. UPS Output circuit breaker c. UPS Battery Monitor circuit breaker d. Maintenance Bypass Panel e. Panel MDPE f. Panel MDPC g. UPS Load bank disconnect Provide ARC Flash Labels on: a. UPS Output circuit breaker b. Maintenance Bypass Panel c. Essential Power Disconnect d. Panel MDPE e. Panel MDPC f. Critical Power Disconnect g. UPS Load bank disconnect
1.04 A.
1.05 A.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL Materials procured and installed in this Section, as well as identification and nameplates shall be in accordance with FAA 1217f.
26 05 53 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2.02 A. RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS Size: Conform to FAA STD-1217f for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. 1. 2. B. C. Color: Black legend on white field. Legend: Indicates voltage and service.
Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl. Legend is laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic bands sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, compounded for permanent directburial service, and embedded continuous metallic strip or core. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. White background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. Brass Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener, 2 inches by 2 inches by 0.05-inch thick. ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS Engraving Stock: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes: 1. Engraved Legend: a. White letters on red face for 480/277VAC systems. b. White letters on black face for 208/120VAC systems. Punched for mechanical fasteners.
D. E.
F. G. H. I.
2.03 A.
2. B.
Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend and size as indicated or as otherwise required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
26 05 53 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT C. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend and size appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. ARC FLASH PROTECTION LABELS Engraving Stock: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes: 1. Engraved Legend: a. Black letters on yellow face
D.
2.04 A.
2.05 A.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, type 6/6 nylon cable ties with 3/16-inch minimum width; 50 lb minimum tensile strength; minus 40 to plus 185 degree F temperature range; and color as indicated where used for colorcoding. Paint: Alkyd-urethane enamel over primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in the contract documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the project. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. Painted Identification: Install painted identification as follows: 26 05 53 - 4
B.
C. D. E.
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. 2. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. Prime surfaces. For galvanized metal use single-component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units use heavy-duty, acrylic-resin block filler. For concrete surfaces use clear, alkaliresistant, alkyd binder-type sealer. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions.
3. 4. F.
Raceway Identification: Identify raceways with color banding and lettering appropriately sized for conduit. Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below for identification: 1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snaparound, colored plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2-color markings in contact, sideby-side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 feet in congested areas. Colors: As follows: a. b. c. Security system - blue and yellow banding only, no lettering. Mechanical and electrical supervisory direct digital control system - green and blue. Telecommunications system - green and yellow.
2. 3.
G.
Circuit Box Identification Labels: Install circuit identification labels on boxes. Label externally as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover, as well as "permanent magic marker" on inside cover. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags, as well as "permanent magic marker" on inside cover. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. Underground Electrical Line Paths: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal and communications lines, install continuous underground warning tape located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, use a single line marker. Install warning tape for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. Panelboards, disconnects, and electrical switching equipment shall be labeled with two separate labels. An equipment identification label, and an arc fault protection label as shown below:
5.
26 05 53 - 5
PANEL MDPE 208/120 VAC 3 PHASE - 4 WIRE
Diagram 3.1 - Example Equipment Identification
ARC FLASH PROTECTION 5000 AIC RISK CATEGORY 1
Diagram 3.2 - Example Arc Flash Warning Label 6. H. All labeling shall be coordinated with the COTR
Power Circuit Identification: Use metal tags for cables, power feeders in pull boxes, junction boxes, handholes, and switchboard rooms: 1. 2. Legend: 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations and conductor size. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties; fasten bands using integral ears.
I.
Conductor Identification: Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. 2. Conduits and Conductors to be extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. Color-Code Conductors: The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire listed in Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables, for sizes larger than No. 4 AWG. Contractor shall demonstrate non-availability of factory-colored wire before using this application: a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. apply the last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. Where conductors are color-coded by this method, they shall be color-coded in accessible raceways, panelboards, outlets, and switches, as well as at all terminations. Conductors in accessible raceways shall be color-coded so that by removing or opening any cover, the coding will be visible.
b.
26 05 53 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT c. Phase, ground, and neutral conductors shall be color-coded in accordance with Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. Green insulated conductors shall not be re-identified for purposes other than grounding. White or neutral gray conductors shall not be re-identified for purposes other than grounded neutrals.
d. e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number and phase. Use color-coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation at enclosure and terminations. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding or cable marking tape. Warning, Caution, and Instruction Signs: Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved, plasticlaminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Emergency-Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer and other emergency operations. Equipment Identification: Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Provide equipment, required under Division 26 with nameplate indicating equipment name, system voltage(s) and phase. Except as otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1 1/2-inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use larger 2-inch high label. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. Power transfer equipment. Contactors. Remote-controlled switches. Control devices. Inverters. Rectifiers. Battery racks. Power-generating units.
J.
Conduit Labeling: Label conduit at each end and at pull boxes with characters a minimum 1/4-inch high. 26 05 53 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT AND ROOF REPLACEMENT K. Other Components Labeling: Apply identification labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution control components above, except panelboards, and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
END OF SECTION
26 05 53 - 8
26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This Section includes individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for feeder and equipment disconnect switches; feeder overcurrent protection; motor disconnect switches; and enclosed circuit breakers. REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below are referenced as the latest edition published as of the date of this document. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Federal Standards (FS) 1. C. FS WC-375 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service
1.02 A.
B.
D.
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 1. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems
E.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. 2. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches NEMA KS1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)
F.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 29 CFR 1910.7 Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)
G.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 1. 1.03 A. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
SUBMITTALS: The following shall be submitted in accordance with 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Product Data 1. 2. 3. 4. Switches Circuit Breakers Other specified accessories Include descriptive data and time-current curves; let-through current curves for circuit breakers with current-limiting characteristics. Coordinate charts and tables and related data.
B.
Test Reports 1. 2. Field Testing Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
C.
Certificates 1. 2. Firms and Persons Qualifications Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.04 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency shall meet 29 CFR 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, or shall be a full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in PART 3. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Listed and Labeled: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "Listed" and "Labeled" are as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C.
D. E.
26 28 16 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT F. G. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A NRTL as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7. Single Source Responsibility: All enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall be product of a single manufacturer and shall be coordinated with Section 26 00 01, General Provisions for Government-Furnished Equipment (GFE). Available Fault Current: All provided gear from this Section shall be suitable for the available fault current in the area of use.
H.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. DISCONNECT SWITCHES Switches shall be of the voltage and current ratings indicated on the drawings, and each shall be capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the motor for which it is to be used. The locked rotor current will be assumed to be 10 times the full rated load current. Switches shall be the quick-make, quick-break type. Except for ground lugs which shall be bonded to the housing, parts shall be mounted on insulating bases to permit replacement of any part from the front of the switch. All current carrying parts shall be of high conductivity copper unless otherwise specified, and shall be designed to carry rated current without excessive heating. Switch contacts shall be silver tungsten or plated to minimize corrosion, pitting and oxidation and to assure suitable conductivity. Enclosed, Non-Fusible Switch: NEMA KS1, type HD, lockable handle, with 2 padlocks. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, Below 800 Amperes: NEMA KS1, type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. Provide rejection type fuse clips with switches. Spare Fuses: Provide 2 sets of spare fuses for each fusible device. Enclosures: NEMA KS1, type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. 2. F. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
B. C.
D. E.
Auxiliary Contact for Variable Frequency Drive Equipment: One normally open, one normally closed (where applicable).
26 28 16 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 2.02 A. B. ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB1, lockable handle, with 2 padlocks complying with FS WC-375. Characteristics: Interrupting rating, frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated. Circuit breakers shall have a quick-make and quickbreak toggle mechanism, inverse-time trip characteristics and shall be trip-free on overload or short-circuit. Automatic release shall be secured by bi-metallic thermal element releasing the mechanism latch. a magnetic armature shall be provided to trip the breaker instantaneously for short-circuit currents above the overload range. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON positions. Interchangeable Trips: Circuit breakers, 200 amperes and larger, with trip units interchangeable within frame size. Field-Adjustable Trips: Circuit breakers, 400 amperes and larger, with adjustable, short-time and continuous-current settings. Molded-Case Switch: Where indicated, molded-case circuit breaker without trip units. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of conductors indicated. Shunt Trip: Where indicated. 120 volts, 60 Hz. Accessories: As indicated. Enclosure: NEMA AB1, type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. 2. J. K. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
C. D. E. F. G. H. I.
Motor Disconnect: Provide each motor with a disconnecting means and a manually operated switch as shown on the drawings or when required by NFPA 70. Single Phase Motors: Provide a single-pole or double-pole toggle switch, rated only for AC, for motor capacities less than 30 amperes, providing that the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
26 28 16 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb. Install wiring between disconnect switches, circuit breakers, control and indication devices. Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, for disconnect switches and for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. ADJUSTING Set field-adjustable disconnect switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated in the short circuit coordination study. CLEANING After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.02 A.
B.
3.03 A.
3.04 A.
END OF SECTION
26 28 16 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY: This section describes the requirements for modifications to the existing fire detection and alarm system. 1.02 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. A. B. C. D. E. 1.03 NFPA 72 ANSI.A 117.1 FAA- 1217f UL FPED UL 268 National Fire Alarm Code Americans with Disabilities Act Interior Work, Electrical Fire Protection Equipment Directory Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems
SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data for each type of device specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 72 and FAA-C-1217f for components and installation. In case of conflict between provisions of codes, laws and ordinances, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. The system configuration, installation, programming and testing shall be supervised by a National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) Level III Fire Alarm Engineering Technician C. Material and Equipment Qualifications: 1. Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. 2. All equipment and system components shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall be the same manufacturer as the existing Fire Alarm System. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 13 00 - 1
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory for their intended use. The terms "listed and labeled" as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 1.05 WORKING CONDITIONS
A. Coordination of Work: The Contractor shall be responsible for prior coordination of all work and demolition with the COTR as well as work with other trades. B. Existing Fire Alarm System: The existing fire alarm system shall remain operational AT ALL TIMES. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Contractor provided equipment shall be protected from damage and stored in a dry location from the time of site delivery. Furnish and energize space heaters or provide desiccant recommended by the equipment manufacturer to prevent condensation. Conduct routine inspections of stored equipment to check equipment condition.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Spot Type Smoke Detectors: These detectors shall be system-operated, addressable, plug-in type detectors that mount to a twist lock base, to prevent unauthorized removal of smoke detector heads. Detector shall operate on the photoelectric or ionization principle, as indicated on the drawings, or similar to existing devices. The detector shall contain an alarm initiating LED that will illuminate to signal activation of the detector. Detectors shall be UL listed Smoke-Automatic Fire Detectors tested in accordance with UL 268. Each detector shall be monitored individually, via an integral, analog addressable element. Detectors shall automatically adjust sensitivity to compensate for dirt or dust in the chamber (drift compensation). When detectors are out of UL listed sensitivity range or compensation is too frequent, detectors shall initiate a trouble signal and display a message that indicates the detector is dirty and requires cleaning. Malfunction of the electrical circuitry to the detector shall actuate the system trouble devices. Detector bases shall be provided with screw-type terminal for wiring connectors. Detector spacing and location shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, the requirements of NFPA 72, and as indicated on the drawings. Area smoke detectors shall be mounted on the ceiling of finished areas. No smoke detector shall be mounted within three (3) feet of a supply air register regardless of what is shown on the drawings. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 13 00 - 2
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT 2.02 VISIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Visible notification appliances shall consist of a Xenon flash tube, high intensity strobe lamp, with clear (nominal white) light having a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10's of one second (0.2 seconds), with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. The pulse duration is defined as the time interval between initial and final points of 10 percent of maximum signal. B. Visible notification appliances shall be a minimum of 15/75 cd and maximum of 120 cd. Placement shall be in accordance with this section, NFPA 72 and ADA. Wall mounted visible notification appliances shall be mounted not less than 80 inches above the finished floor, or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower. Ceiling mounted visible notification appliances shall be located in accordance to Table 6-4.4.1.1(b) of NFPA 72. Placement of visible notification appliances in rooms and corridors more than 20 feet wide shall be in accordance with Figure 64.4.1.1 and Table 6-4.4.1.1(a) of NFPA 72. Placement of visible notification appliances in corridors 20 feet or less in width shall be in accordance with Table 64.4.2.1 of NFPA 72. C. Visible notification appliances shall be listed in accordance with UL 1971. Visible notification appliance circuits connected to this device shall be configured so that all associated wiring is supervised, and is separate from audible notification appliance circuits. Visible appliances shall activate anytime audible appliances are activated. This activation shall occur when the audible circuit is activated manually or automatically without operating additional switches. D. Where there are more than three strobes within the same view (135 degrees) the strobes shall be synchronized in accordance with Section 6-4.4.1.1 of NFPA 72. Synchronized flashing shall be defined as all strobe lights flashing within 50 milliseconds of one another. 2.02 CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAY
A. All wiring installed as part of this project shall be installed in conduit or raceway. B. All electrical enclosures, raceways and conduits shall contain only those electrical circuits associated with the fire alarm system and shall not contain any circuits that are unrelated to the system. C. Wiring shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer and shall meet the requirements of Article 760 of NFPA 70 and as modified herein. Cables and conductors having scrapes, nicks, and gouges or crushed insulation shall not be used. All system conductors, except grounding conductors, shall be solid copper. Use of aluminum wire is prohibited. All new fire alarm system conductors shall be of the following type(s):
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
28 13 00 - 3
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT 1. Signaling Line Circuits: The wiring between addressable devices shall be Class A (Style "6" or "7") as described in Table 3-6 of NFPA 72. Class A signaling line circuits shall be run in two separate conduits. Each leg of the circuit shall be physically separated by minimum 2 hour fire rated construction, as shown on the drawings, and arranged such that severing one of the conduits will not put any portion of the system out of service. T-tapping shall not be permitted. Circuits connecting remote Alpha/Numeric annunciation devices with the control panel may be Class B (Style 4) as described in Table 3-6 of NFPA 72. The Contractor shall note this within the submittal documents. All signaling line circuits shall be wired with 18 AWG (minimum), twisted, shielded pair type FPLP, FPLR or FPL wire (for use as permitted by NFPA 70, Article 760). Wire substitutions shall not be permitted, including those substitutions permitted by NFPA 70, Article 760 and manufacturers installation instructions unless approved in writing by the COTR. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Notification appliance circuits shall be Class A (Style "Z"), arranged to be capable of operation during a single break or single ground. Visual and audio devices shall be installed on separate circuits. All audible notification appliance circuits shall be 16AWG minimum twisted shielded pair per manufacturers requirements. All visual notification appliance circuits shall be 12AWG minimum THHN or twisted shielded pairs per manufacturers requirements. 3. Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm (PLFA) circuits shall be installed in conformance with parts A and C of Article 760. All wiring and wiring methods will be in accordance with the manufacturers installation recommendations and instructions (except where modified in other paragraphs of this Specification).
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
A. The job site supervisor shall examine daily all areas in which the work will be performed on the day prior to beginning work. The supervisor shall immediately report unsatisfactory working conditions to the COTR for resolution. The supervisor shall not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory working conditions have been corrected. B. Prior to any work on site, the Contractor shall fully inspect the facility and its systems to document damage, or non-functional or non-complying facilities. Any and all deficiencies not specifically described by the Contractor in a report after such inspection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace during construction. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 13 00 - 4
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT 3.02 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise required by these Specifications, the installation of fire alarm circuits shall conform to the requirements of Article 760 and raceway installation to the applicable sections of Chapter 3 of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Fire alarm circuit wiring shall include all circuits described in Section 760-1 including Fine Print Note No. 1 (FPN No. 1). B. Fire alarm circuits installed in locations other than ordinary indoor, dry locations shall be in conformance with Sections 760-3 and 760-7 with conductor or cable types suitable for the installation conditions. C. Separation of circuits shall be in conformance with Section 760-27 for NPLFA circuits and Section 760-54 for PLFA circuits. D. Contractor is responsible for protecting existing smoke detectors during construction. These detectors shall be covered during construction. All such covers shall be removed upon completion of work. 3.03 WIRING METHODS
A. All circuit runs shall be continuous between devices, without splices, wherever feasible. Where a continuous run is not feasible, connections shall be made in a ULI listed metal electrical box. Wire nuts shall not be permitted. All connections shall be to terminal blocks in metal enclosures conforming to the requirements of Chapter 3 of NFPA 70. Conductors connected together shall have the same color and type insulation. All connections shall be accessible for inspection and servicing and shall be clearly identified with a permanent approved wire label and noted on the Contractor record drawings. B. Pigtail or T tap connections to fire alarm initiating devices, notification devices and control circuits are not acceptable. Conductors looped around terminals are also not acceptable. C. Each conductor used for the same specific function shall be distinctively color coded. Use two different color codes for each interior alarm circuit, one for each loop. Each circuit color code wire shall remain uniform throughout circuit. Each conductor termination shall be shall be uniquely identified with tags at both ends. The wire tags shall be computer generated printed labels. These tags shall indicate the wire/cable functions i.e.; XX Floor Horns, XX Floor Strobe, XX, XX, XX, Addressable Loop, and etc. The conductors shall be tagged at every termination. These conductor numbers shall be shown on the Contractor's record drawings (floor plans and detailed wiring diagrams) in a manner allowing ready identification of all conductor terminations. D. All conduit shall be grounded by approved ground clamps or other means in conformance with NFPA 70 and FAA Orders. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 13 00 - 5
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT
E. All conductor shielding shall be continuous (with splices) for the length of the circuit, grounded at the associated control panel only. F. Shield drain conductors and foil shall be trimmed and taped at each splice to prevent grounding of the shield at any location other than the associated control panel
G. Fire alarm conductors shall be separated into three categories: 1. Data circuits, including signaling line circuits, addressable initiating device and auxiliary function circuits and annunciator circuits, and 24 VDC power circuits for addressable devices. 2. Low voltage non-data circuits, including one-way voice communications circuits, pre-amp audio, and notification appliance circuits. 3. AC Power Circuits. H. Each category of fire alarm conductors shall be installed in physically separated, dedicated conduits, and shall not interface with one another except at common associated control equipment. Addressable modules or elements used to provide system "addresses" for non-addressable type initiating devices shall be considered "control equipment" for the purposes of this section. Fire alarm system conductors shall be further segregated as necessary to conform to the fire alarm system manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to prevent electrical and/or audio crosstalk between conductors installed in common conduits. I. Where conduit is imbedded in plaster, the Contractor shall use a type approved by the local Electrical Code for this use. All joints in such imbedded conduit shall be liquid and gas-tight. Continuous run of conduit without joints is preferred for imbedding. PROGRAMMING
3.04
A. All reprogramming of the system to add or eliminate components must be completed by the FAAs fire alarm maintenance contractor, Simplex, 1-800-4442168. The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with work accomplished by Simplex to complete the work required by this contract. B. The Contractor is responsible to directly coordinate with and pay for all work required by Simplex. 3.05 TESTING
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall perform and document, in an approved format, system tests as required herein to
28 13 00 - 6
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT demonstrate that the system is fully operational. All acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the FAA or its designated representatives. B. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, coordination and personnel necessary to perform and document all required tests. All test equipment shall be subject to the approval of the COTR. Fire alarm systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with fire alarm systems and accessory equipment shall be tested accordance with NFPA 72. C. Acceptance testing shall include all fire alarm components that were modified, disconnected, removed, replaced, reconnected and/or reconfigured as a part of the work required by this contract and may include, but not be limited to: 1. All conductors, including shielding conductors, shall be tested for continuity, shorts to ground and shorts between pairs. Any circuit board jumpers in the system that inhibit checking for ground faults shall be identified and shown to be in the correct position. Provide a diagram of the circuit board with the abovementioned jumper highlighted. 2. All remote transmitting panel monitor points shall be functionally tested and monitor point identifications verified. 3. All alarm initiating devices shall be functionally tested and labels shall be verified for correctness at all annunciators. 4. All supervisory functions of each initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit shall be functionally tested. 5. All fire safety functions (i.e. stair vented vestibule system operation, door release, etc.) initiated by the fire alarm control panel shall be tested. 6. Receipt of all alarm and trouble signals, initiated during the course of the testing, shall be verified at each annunciation device. 7. Correct labeling of all switches shall be verified. 8. Sound level tests shall be performed in all rooms and areas on each floor and all corridors to verify minimum conformance with this specification. 9. The system CPU, annunciators and DACT shall be load tested for 60 hours on standby battery power. 10. Prior to the test, provide copies of records from the UL listed Central Station Service showing the DACT has successfully sent the required test signals to the Central Station for at least four (4) consecutive days immediately prior to the testing. 11. Any additional tests, required by the referenced codes, standards, or criteria, or by the FAA, shall be performed. 12. Copies of documentation of such tests shall be provided to the FAA Safety Representative and/or COTR at the completion of the test.
28 13 00 - 7
WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT **END OF SECTION**
28 13 00 - 8

Dtfaen 12 R 30377 Specs

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Dtfaen 12 R 30377 Specs

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT WORCESTER, MA AIRPORT TRAFFIC CONTROL TOWER CAB ROOF AND HVAC REPLACEMENT

This page intentionally left blank.

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

L. ORH-704252- M001 M. ORH-704252-M002 N. ORH-704252-M003 O. ORH-704252-E001 P. ORH-704252-E002 Q. ORH-704252-E003

*** END OF SECTION ***

EXECUTION --NOT USED.

*** END OF SECTION ***

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PRODUCTS (NOT USED.)

EXECUTION (NOT USED.)

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PRODUCTS --NOT USED.

EXECUTION --NOT USED. *** END OF SECTION ***

This page intentionally left blank.

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

MATERIAL APPROVAL SUBMITTAL

SUBMITTAL NEW RESUBMITTAL

PREVIOUS SUBMISSION NUMBER

FOR GOVERNMENT USE ONLY DISSEE INITIAL APPROVED REVERSE

TYPED OR PRINTED NAME

TYPED OR PRINTED NAME TO (Contracting Officer)

TYPED OR PRINTED NAME TO (CONTRACTOR)

TYPED OR PRINTED NAME

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

NFPA 70 NFPA 70E

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

29 CFR 1910 29 CFR 1910.146 29 CFR 1926 29 CFR 1926.500 1.03

SUBMITTALS: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

*** END OF SECTION ***

This page intentionally left blank.

*** END OF SECTION ***

TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

This page intentionally left blank.

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

*** END OF SECTION ***

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

*** END OF SECTION ***

CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION (CAI)

EXECUTION (Not Used)

*** END OF SECTION ***

*** END OF SECTION ***

SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION

WORCESTER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ATCT HVAC AND ROOF REPLACEMENT

SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION

SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION

This page intentionally left blank.

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

EXECUTION --NOT USED. * END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *

* END OF SECTION *